Home

Pontiac 2000 Automobile User Manual

Contents

1. Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY ae p e SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter a e E Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation PF pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 7 24 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control pane See ae x i If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter ha ee Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add the proper supercharger oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
2. 2002 Pontiac Bonneville Owner s Manual Litho in U S A Copyright General Motors Corporation 06 14 01 Part Number 25730143 A First Edition All Rights Reserved PONTIAC GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem PONTIAC the PONTIAC Emblem and the name BONNEVILLE are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Pontiac Division whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it ii a N We support voluntary technician certification CERTIFIED WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE i J For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual Aux propri taires canadiens Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais chez votre concessionaire ou au Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the fe
3. Be sure the arrow on the pressure cap lines up like this 5 20 If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place
4. 97 500 Miles 162 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL oe SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation a i pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 7 29 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Inspect spark plug wires ACTUAL SERVICED BY SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service MILEAGE Replace spark plugs Oooo o An Emission Control Service Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transaxle fluid change both the fluid and filter 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use MILEAGE Inspect hoses Clean radiator
5. If your vehicle has the GM Oil Life System a computer system lets you know when to change the oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary An ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will come on Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you stop for fuel It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Oil Life System in the Index for information on resetting the system A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this
6. With the proper preparation and equipment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing following 4 30 Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing What s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations How far will you tow Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow Do you have the proper towing equipment See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations Is your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip you want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip in the Index Dinghy Towing Dolly Towing NOTICE Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground If your vehicle must be towed you should use a dolly See Dolly Towing following for more information Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly To tow your vehicle using a dolly follow these steps 1 Put the front wheels on the dolly Put the vehicle in PARK P Set the parking brake and then remove the key AOUN Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position 5 Release the parking brake 4 31 L
7. available when the vehicle is within the operating range of a cellular provider subject to limitations caused by atmospheric conditions such as severe weather or topographical conditions such as mountainous terrain subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations Global positioning locating capabilities will not be available if satellite signals are obstructed OnStar will not function if the vehicle s battery is discharged or disconnected It may also be inoperative if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle electrical system components are damaged OnStar is the communication link between you and existing governmental emergency and roadside service providers OnStar will receive your call and use reasonable effort to contact an appropriate provider OnStar cannot promise that the providers will respond in a timely manner or at all Express Sunroof Option The sunroof has both manual and express features for opening the glass panel and sunshade If your vehicle has this option the switch for the sunroof is located on the headliner between the sun Visors The sunroof switch has four positions that control the sunroof movement The switch will work only when the ignition is on or when the RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power in the Index Open Press and hold the switch rearward to the first position to open the glass panel and sunshade The sunshade can also be opened
8. Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait Pontiac helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement up to 30 per day five days maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such
9. This procedure changes the mode for only the transmitter used to change this setting The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter 2 16 To verify the mode selected remove the key from the ignition and close all of the doors after you ve exited the vehicle Press the lock button on the transmitter to be verified and confirm the appropriate feedback Repeat with the unlock button If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center DIC you must program this feature through the DIC See Driver Information Center Personalization Programming in the Index Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it See your dealer to match additional transmitters to your vehicle Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about four years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won
10. the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag the side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver and right front passenger s side impact air bags will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle 1 28 When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air bags inflate if battery power is available You can lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using the door lock and interior lamp controls In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation systems Improper service can mean that an air Additional windshi
11. For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs 1 39 Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints 1 40 The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that s unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries
12. a eB mss i t mig e x Playing the Radio PWR Power Press this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume SCV Speed Compensated Volume With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select MIN MED or MAX Each higher choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV select OFF RCL Recall Push this knob to display the station being played or to display the clock Pushing this knob with the ignition off will display the clock Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Turn this knob to choose radio stations A SEEK V Press the up or down arrow to go to the next or previous station and stay there The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while seeking 3 29 A SCAN V Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Pr
13. in COMPASS NW VW DRIVER INFORMATION HEHE GB Gb RE 85 86 88 G6 BE The earth s magnetic field is not always the same direction as true north as we know it So you must enter a zone number to tell the compass the difference between magnetic and actual north This tells the compass where in the country you are driving The compass remembers your zone so you only have to change it if you drive to a new zone on the map The compass adjusts only a small amount for each zone so you may not notice a difference if you drive from one zone to the next one until you cross several zones Choosing Your Zone Number Locate your zone number on the above map If your number is different than the one shown when you turn the key on follow the steps to change your zone number If you live on the line you can pick the zone area you are most likely to drive in In Alaska use Zone 9 or 10 In Hawaii use Zone 7 Changing Your Zone Number 1 Press MODE to display COMPASS CALIBRATION 2 Press SELECT to display RESET CHANGES ZONE 3 Press RESET until your number appears 4 Press MODE to exit the COMPASS CALIBRATION MODE and store the new zone number When the MODE button is pressed the DIC will return to the VEHICLE DATA mode Calibrating the Compass All electronic compasses need to know the magnetic profile of your vehicle This is called calibration and is done automatically by your compass But the
14. s frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts because inflation would not help the occupant The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes A side impact air bag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Side impact air bags are not designed to inflate in frontal or near frontal impacts rollovers or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant A side impact air bag will only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal air bags inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near frontal impacts For side impact air bags inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact What makes an air bag inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash For both frontal and side impact air bags the sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel instrument panel and the side of t
15. t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well On a long uphill grade shift down to THIRD 3 and reduce your speed to around 45 mph 70 km h to reduce the possibility of the engine and transaxle overheating 4 40 Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and then shift to PARK P 5 Release the regular brakes When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you start your engine shift into a gear and release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that ar
16. 6 70 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Usage Micro Relay Oxygen Sensor 31 Injector Bank 1 32 Auxiliary Power 33 Cigar Lighter Mini Relay Fog Lamps Daytime 34 Running Lamps Horn a3 Air Conditioning Clutch 36 37 Usage 38 Headlamp High Beam 39 Headlamp Low Beam 40 Fog Lamps Daytime Running Lamps Usage Horn Air Conditioning Clutch HVAC Solenoid Usage Accessory Air Pump Starter 1 Cooling Fan Secondary Ignition 1 Cooling Fan Series Parallel Cooling Fan Primary Maxibreaker 41 Maxifuse 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Usage Starter Usage A LR Not Used Antilock Brake System Not Used Cooling Fan Secondary Cooling Fan Primary Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Fuse Puller Removing the Rear Seat Cushion NOTICE The battery and main fuse blocks are located under the rear seat cushion The battery s ground terminal and some relay wires are exposed To help avoid damage to the battery and wires be careful when removing or reinstalling the seat cushion Do not remove covers from covered parts Do not store anything under the seat as objects could touch exposed wires and cause a short To remove the rear seat cushion do the following 1 Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the front hooks 2 Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the vehicle 6 71 A safety belt that isn t properly routed through the seat cu
17. ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 21 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be repeated after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals for the life of this vehicle The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be repeated at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km for the life of this vehicle See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following 7 22 Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded If your vehicle has the GM Oil Life System a computer system lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicat
18. Center DIC you must program this feature through the DIC See Driver Information Center Personalization Programming in the Index Rear Door Security Lock Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors of your vehicle from the inside Using One of These Locks 1 Open the rear door you want to lock 2 Move the lever located on the inside door edge all the way up to the ENGAGED position 3 Close the door 4 Do the same thing to the other rear door lock 2 11 The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use Opening a Rear Door When the Security Lock is On 1 Unlock the door 2 Then open the door from the outside If you don t cancel the security lock feature adults or older children who ride in the rear seat won t be able to open the rear door from the inside You should let adults and older children know how these security locks work and how to cancel the locks Canceling the Rear Door Lock 1 Unlock and open the door from the outside 2 Move the lever all the way down 3 Do the same for the other rear door The rear door locks will now work normally 2 12 Anti Lockout Feature The power door locks will not work if the key is in the ignition and any door is open You can override this feature by holding the driver s power door lock switch for more than three seconds Leaving Your
19. Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the Index for further details 7 31 At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Also see Wiper Blades Cleaning in the Index Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 7 32 Automatic Transaxle Check Check the transaxle fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transaxle Fluid in the Index A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylin
20. DIC Personalization Programming in the Index for programming instructions Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger s side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors Option When you operate the rear window defogger a defogger also warms the heated driver s and passenger s outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice and snow Storage Compartments Glove Box Use the master key to lock and unlock the glove box To open it lift the latch release on the left side of the glove box door The VALET key will not work in the glove box door lock Front Storage Armrest Press the buttons on either side of the armrest to open the storage area for cassette tapes gloves etc Center Console Option Press the button at the front edge of the armrest to open the storage area for cassette tapes gloves etc 2 57 Rear Armrest Your vehicle has a rear armrest with cupholders and a pass through feature Rear Storage Compartment Option Your vehicle may have a rear storage armrest with cupholders and a pass through feature Lift the front of the cover on the armre
21. Don t park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed immediately 2 38 Running Your Engine While You re Parked It s better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park ina garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t move See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you are parking on a hill
22. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Gage on ie on ss gt OIL PSI A O OILkPa A United States Canada Readings above the shaded warning zone indicate the normal operating range Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity A reading in the shaded warning zone may be caused by a low oil level or another problem causing low oil pressure On vehicles with the systems monitor the CHECK GAGES light will come on and a warning chime will sound On vehicles with a DIC a CHEC
23. HUD Option If the HUD image is too bright or too high in your field of view it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it s dark outside Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view If you have the optional Head Up Display HUD you can see some of the driver information also available on your instrument panel cluster The information may be displayed in English or metric units and appears as a reflection on the windshield The HUD shows the following Speedometer Reading Turn Signal Indicators e High beam Indicator Symbol CHECK GAGES Message for low oil pressure high coolant temperature low oil level high low battery brake ABS and air bag Low Fuel Warning Symbol Radio Frequency and Playback Mode CHECK GAGES p K Di tity ae DO I a MPH bt mt in bts e AMFMCD HUD shows these images when they are lighted on the instrument panel The speedometer may display a difference of 1 5 mph 2 4 km h from the HUD image This is normal 2 109 When the ignition key is turned to ON all possible HUD images will come on then the HUD will operate normally If you never look at your instrument panel cluster you wean up SPLA may not see something important such as a warning A light So be sure to scan your displays and controls and an petted the driving environment just as you would in a vehicle o Fig without HUD NO
24. P or turning the key to OFF If you choose ON for UNLOCK and ALL for DOOR TO UNLOCK all doors will automatically unlock when shifting into PARK P or turning the key to OFF To change modes do the following 1 Move the arrow on the display between the selections by pressing the RESET button 2 Once you have made your selection press the SELECT button and your choice will be retained in memory See Automatic Door Locks in the Index for more information about this feature 2 105 Window Lockout Personalization The number of passenger windows locked out by the window LOCK switch can be programmed through the DIC If you choose R PASS all three passenger window switches will be inactive when the window LOCK switch is enabled If you choose REAR only the two rear passenger window switches will be locked out when the window LOCK switch is enabled To change modes do the following 1 Move the arrow on the display between R PASS and REAR by pressing the RESET button 2 Once you have made your selection press the SELECT button Your choice will be retained in memory For more information on this feature see Window Lock in the Index 2 106 Security Feedback By choosing different combinations of these selections you can choose the type of transmitter activated feedback when locking and unlocking your vehicle with your transmitter Each time you make a selection by pressing the RESET but
25. The drivers are recognized as DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2 You will let the DIC know which driver you are by using your remote keyless entry transmitter or by pressing the appropriate memory seat control button located on the driver s door or by choosing the driver with the DIC Each remote keyless entry transmitter was preprogrammed to belong to DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 Each transmitter may be programmed differently for each driver When you press the button with the unlock symbol on your transmitter the DIC will automatically change driver numbers and the vehicle will recall the personalization settings that were last made to correspond to your transmitter including your radio and comfort control settings See Comfort Controls Personalization in the Index If you unlock the vehicle using your door key instead of your transmitter the DIC will not change drivers and will recall the information from the last transmitter use or the last driver change using the memory seat controls If this happens and you were not the last driver of the vehicle simply press your correct driver number on the memory seat controls or press the button with the unlock symbol on your transmitter or select the personalization programming mode and choose the correct driver number Use the following steps for personalization programming instructions 1 Turn the ignition on and keep the transaxle in PARK P 2 Press the MODE button to reach personaliza
26. They ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you and the high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to turn the high beam headlamps off 2 42 Windshield Wipers The windshield wipers are controlled by the lever on the right of your steering column If your windshield wipers are on for more than six seconds while you are driving the low beam headlamps instrument panel cluster backlighting and the taillamps will turn on For more information see Wiper Activated Headlamps in the Index OFF Lower the lever to its original position to turn the wipers OFF INT Intermittent Push the lever up to the INT position and turn the INT ADJ band to adjust the delay time The further you turn the band the shorter the delay between wiping cycles LO Low Speed Push the lever up to LO for steady wiping at a slow speed HI High Speed Push the lever up to HI for steady wiping at a high speed MIST For a single wiping cycle push the lever down to the MIST position and let go The wipers will stop after one cycle If you want more cycles hold the lever down Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload Keep in mind that damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely To avoid damage be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
27. Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints Restraint Systems for Children An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 1 41 A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for the child s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields 1 42 A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some high back booster seats have a five point harness A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window Q How do child restraints work A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by the vehicle s owner For many years add on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the veh
28. and you could lose control Don t use cruise control on slippery roads If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional traction control system begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage See Traction Control System in the Index When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may turn the cruise control back on Setting Cruise Control Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise lever up to R A resume accelerate briefly You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there Remember that if you hold the lever at R A the If you leave your cruise control switch on when vehicle will keep going faster until you release the you re not using cruise you might hit a button switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go and go into cruise when you don t want to You faster don t hold the lever at R A could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the SET button and then release it as well fy Move ieee controlswitch toON as the accelerator pedal You now cruise at the 2 Get up to the speed you want higher speed 3 Press the SET button Move the cruise switch to R A Hold it there until 4 Take your f
29. cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off 2 87 Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Fuel in the Index Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed 2 88 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle
30. negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And don t connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks Connect the red positive cable to the remote positive terminal of the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 10 11 Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while Try to start the vehicle that had the dead bat
31. one located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side and the other under the rear seat on the driver s side If a MaxiFuse should blow have your vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately Removing Fuses You will find a fuse puller attached in both of the fuse blocks Snap the wide end of the fuse puller on to the fuse at the side indentations holding the puller and pull the fuse out 6 68 Engine Compartment Fuse Block As mentioned previously the engine compartment fuse block is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger s side Lift the cover to gain access Fuse 22 or 23 can be moved to the outer position to enable the accessory power outlet or cigarette lighter when the ignition is not on See your dealer for additional assistance if needed Minifuse 1 2 3 4 a 47 26 25 24 23 22 46 32 31 30 29 40 9 45 21 20 L19 JU18 J 07 Usage Not Used Accessory Windshield Wipers Not Used Headlamp Low Beam Left Minifuse 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Usage Headlamp Low Beam Right Spare Powertrain Control Module Battery Headlamp High Beam Right Headlamp High Beam Left Ignition 1 Not Used Transaxle Cruise Control Direct Ignition System Injector Bank 2 Not Used Not Used Powertrain Control Module Ignition 6 69 Minifuse Micro Relay
32. such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information 8 10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors
33. t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery NOTICE When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter For battery replacement use one Duracell battery type DL 2032 or a similar type 2 17 To replace the battery do the following 1 Insert a thin coin or similar object into the notch near the key ring Turn it counterclockwise to separate the two halves of the transmitter Once the transmitter is separated use a pencil eraser to remove the old battery Do not use a metal object Remove and replace the battery Replace it as the instructions inside the cover indicate Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure no moisture can enter Check the operation of the transmitter 2 18 Trunk It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the trunk lid Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the setting on Vent or with RE
34. the SELECT knob another EQ setting will appear on the display 5 Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT knob to store the equalization preset You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will appear on the display 6 Repeat the steps for each EQ setting EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with talk radio but it can be preset to a different tone Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL Balance Press and release this button until BAL appears on the display The SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press and release this button until FADE appears on the display The SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for two seconds will return all speaker settings to the middle position 3 23 Using RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS is a system that sends data along with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned to You can use RDS to display program information and to control your radio With RDS the radio can do the following e Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to
35. the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle Don t use your compact spare on other vehicles And don t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They won t fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together NOTICE Tire chains won t fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too Don t use tire chains on your compact spare 5 31 If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you don t want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer 5 32 NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth you can destroy your transaxle For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First t
36. until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered button the PTY you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton RDS Messages ALERTI This type of announcement warns of national or local emergencies You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT appears on the display when an alert announcement plays When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape is playing If the cassette tape is playing play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished INFO Information If the current station has a message INFO will appear on the display Press this button to see the message If the whole message does not appear on the display parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed To see the parts of the message faster than every three seconds press this button again A new group of words will appear on the display Once the complete message has been displayed INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received TRAF Traffic Press this button to receive traffic announcements The traffic announcement brackets will appear on the display TRAF will appear on the display if the current station broadcasts traffic announcements If the current station does not broadcast traffic announcements the radio will seek to a station that does When
37. warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs you ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle These schedules are for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle s Tire Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index
38. 12378488 8 oz 0 237 L Spot Lifter Quickly and easily removes spots and stains from oe carpets vinyl and cloth upholstery See your General Motors parts department for these products See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 65 Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M072675 a This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration 6 66 Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on your spare tire cover It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label is your VIN the model designation paint information and e a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment NOTICE Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can kee
39. 3743 As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside Assistance program This value added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road Pontiac s Roadside Assistance toll free number is staffed by a team of technically trained advisors who are available 24 hours a day 365 days a year We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phone or making arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Pontiac dealer We will provide the following services for 3 years 36 000 miles 60 000 km at no expense to you Fuel delivery Lock out service identification required Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service Change a flat tire Jump starts We have quick easy access to telephone numbers of the following additional services depending on your needs Hotels Glass replacement Tire repair facilities Rental vehicle or taxis Airports or train stations Police fire department or hospitals In many instances mechanical failures are covered under Pontiac s comprehensive warranty However when other services are utilized our advisors will explain any payment obligations you might incur For prompt and efficient assistance when calling please provide the following information to give the advisor Location of vehicle Telephone number of yo
40. Air Cleaner Filter The engine air cleaner filter is in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location 6 17 To check or replace the engine air cleaner filter do the following 1 Loosen the two clips on top of the engine air cleaner filter housing and lift the filter cover tabs out of the housing Push the housing cover toward the engine compressing the hose Pull out the filter Check or replace the engine air cleaner filter To reinstall the housing cover make sure the filter cover tabs position through the slots in the housing A notch on the sides of the filter cover will indicate the correct engagement Fasten the two clips on the top of the housing when you are finished Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index 6 18 Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Don t drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off NOTICE If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have t
41. DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won t work well or won t work at all So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system 6 31 When your brake fluid falls to a low level your brake warning light will come on If your vehicle has the Driver Information Center the BRAKE FLUID LOW message will also be displayed A chime will sound if you try to drive with this warning light on See Brake System Warning Light in the Index What to Add When you do need brake fluid
42. Driver Information Center It means that an advanced computer controlled system has come on to help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you re steering This stability enhancement system activates when the computer senses that your vehicle is just starting to spin as it might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road When the system is on you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal This is normal When the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message is on you should continue to steer in the direction you want to go The system is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult driving situations by making the most of whatever road conditions will permit If the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message comes on you ll know that something has caused your vehicle to start to spin so you should consider slowing down Tire Pressure Status 144 If you see the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message you should stop as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage If a tire is flat see If a Tire Goes Flat in the Index Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can See Inflation Tire Pressure and Check Tire Pressure System in the Index 2 100 Electronic Compass If your vehicle has a DIC it also is equipped with an electronic compass As with all compasses this unit senses the earth s magnetic field to show the direction the vehicle is pointing
43. Front occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door Anyone who is up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see the part of this manual called Children 1 23 There is an air bag readiness light on AIR the instrument panel which shows BAG AIR BAG The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index for more information 1 24 How the Air Bag Systems Work Where are the air bags The driver s frontal air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel The right front passenger s frontal air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side The driver s side impact air bag is in the side of the driver s seatback closest to the door The right front passenger s side impact air bag is in the side of the passenger s seatback closest to the door 1 25 If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object int
44. Magnetic Speed Variable Assist Steering Option Your vehicle may have this optional steering system that continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds It provides ease when parking yet a firm solid feel at highway speeds Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control Refer to Traction Control in the Index What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on
45. Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position earlier in this section The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again If your vehicle has a center passenger position be sure to use the correct buckle when buckling your lap shoulder belt If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle see if you are using the buckle for the center passenger position Air Bag Systems This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag systems Your vehicle has four air bags a frontal air bag for the driver another frontal air bag for the right front passenger a side impact air bag for the driver and another side impact air bag for the right front passenger Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations 1 21 Here are the most important things to know about the air bag systems You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a
46. STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the Driver Information Center See Stability System Active Message in the Index Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited 4 15 While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid 4 16 Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Don t drink and drive Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you Since you can t see a
47. Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Pontiac Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling 1 800 762 2737 In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Deale
48. That can make it overheat damaging the lighter and the heating element The cigarette lighter will only operate when the ignition key is in ON and for 10 minutes after turning the ignition OFF If you would like the lighter to operate regardless of ignition position and for extended periods of time see Engine Compartment Fuse Block in the Index or see your dealer Sun Visors To block out glare you can swing down the visors You can also remove them from the center mount and swing them to the side while the auxiliary sunshade remains to block glare from the front Visor Vanity Mirror Open the cover to expose the vanity mirror If your vehicle has the optional lighted vanity mirrors the lamps come on when you open the cover Air Inflator System Option Some vehicles have an air inflator located in the trunk for use in maintaining proper air pressure for the tires 2 59 The air inflator will work only with the ignition on Inflating something too much can make it explode and you or others could be injured Be sure to read the inflator instructions and inflate any object only to its recommended pressure Pressing the AIR button will activate the inflator for ten minutes The air inflator comes with a kit that includes a 20 foot 6 1 m hose and an air pressure gage as well as instructions and special adapters for inflating things like an air mattress or a basketball 2 60 Accessory Power Outl
49. To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Please call us at 1 800 762 2737 or write Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 8 11 SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 120 00 Transmission Transaxle Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides in
50. While elapsed time is showing CD TIME will appear on the display AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a compact disc when listening to the radio CD will appear on the display when a compact disc is loaded If you have the optional CD changer and it is loaded this button will activate the changer and an icon will be lit in the display A Eject Press this button to eject a CD Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first 3 28 Compact Disc Messages CHECK CD If this message appears on the radio display and the disc comes out it could be for one of the following reasons The road is too rough The disc should play when the road is smoother The disc is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio Data System RDS If Equipped if a
51. and if you re pulling a trailer also see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 39 Horn Press on the center area of the steering wheel to sound the horn Tilt Wheel A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is located on the left side of the steering column To tilt the wheel hold the wheel and pull the lever toward you Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable level and release the lever to lock the wheel in place 2 40 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following Turn and Lane Change Signals Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Flash To Pass Feature Cruise Control For information on the exterior lamps see Exterior Lamps later in this section Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it
52. and use only GM Goodwrench DEX COOL or Havoline DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant in the Index Engine Coolant USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Hydraulic Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid Brake System GM Part No 12377967 or equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid GM Optikleen Washer Solvent GM Part No 1051515 or equivalent Chassis Lubricant GM Part No 12377985 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB GM Power Steering Fluid GM Part No 1052884 1 pint 1050017 1 quart or equivalent Automatic DEXRON III Automatic Transaxle Transmission Fluid Windshield Washer Solvent Parking Brake Cable Guides Power Steering System 7 37 Lock Cylinders Supercharger Floor Shift Linkage Hood Latch Assembly Secondary Latch Pivots Spring Anchor and Release Pawl 7 38 Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Supercharger Oil GM Part No 12345982 See Supercharger Oil in the Index Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol GM Part No 12346293 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol GM Part No 12346293 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Hood and Multi Purpose Lubricant Door Hinges Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Fuel Door Multi Purp
53. announcement warns of national or local emergencies You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT appears on the display when an alert announcement plays When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or a compact disc is playing If the cassette tape or compact disc player is playing play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished 3 33 This function will only work during actual emergency broadcasts and will not work during tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations INFO Information If the current station has a message INFO will appear on the display These text messages are from the RDS broadcaster to the listening public and may be general information such as artist and song title call in phone numbers etc Press this button to see the message If the whole message does not appear on the display parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed To scroll through the message at your own speed press the INFO button again for less than one second A new group of words will appear on the display Once the complete message has been displayed INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until a new message is received or a differe
54. as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to 10 per day five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained at actual cost up to a maximum of 30 00 per day supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options
55. at deployment The module also records speed engine rpm brake and throttle data 1 29 Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the air bag systems in several places around your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag systems To purchase a service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag systems Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance 1 30 Center Front Passenger Position Lap Belt If your vehicle has a front bench seat someone can sit in the center position When you sit in the center front seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt E
56. below 40 miles 64 4 km the display will show FUEL RANGE LOW The RESET button does not function in this mode Fuel Used Press the SELECT button until the display shows FUEL USED The value indicates how much fuel has been used since the last reset Don t confuse fuel used with the amount of fuel in your tank To learn how much fuel will be used from a specific starting point press the RESET button for five seconds while the fuel used is displayed on the DIC Battery Volts On vehicles with a supercharged engine press the SELECT button until the display shows BATTERY VOLTS If the voltage is normal the display will show BATTERY VOLTS If the voltage drops below 10 5 volts for 30 seconds the battery volts display will show BATTERY LOW If the voltage is above 16 2 volts for 30 seconds the battery volts display will show BATTERY HIGH If the display shows the high or low message you need to have your battery and or electrical system checked 2 98 GM Oil Life System Press the SELECT button until OIL LIFE appears in the display The OIL LIFE NORMAL display will show an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life When the oil life index is less than 10 an ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will be displayed and the oil life display will show OIL LIFE CHANGE When you have the oil changed according to the maintenance schedule you will have to reset the Oil Life System To reset the Oil Life System see Oil Life System
57. brake pedal will be harder to push Anti Lock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine or when you begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little This is normal Canada ANTI LOCK United States If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index Let s say the road is wet and you re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here s what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock doesn t change the time you need to get your foot up to the br
58. brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco battery When it s time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco battery 6 34 WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling The battery is located under the rear seat cushion To access the battery see Removing the Rear Seat Cushion in the Index You don t need to access the battery to jump start your vehicle See Jump Starting in the Index A battery that isn t properly vented can let sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rear seat cushion These fumes can damage your rear seat safety belt systems You may not be able to see this damage and the safety belts might not provide the protection needed in a crash If a replacement battery is ever needed it must be vented in the same manner as the original battery Always make sure that the vent hose is properly reattached before reinstalling t
59. buttons 1 or 2 for this feature are located on the driver s door panel and correspond to the numbers 1 or 2 found on the back of each remote keyless entry transmitter To recall comfort settings press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter before entering your vehicle If you enter your vehicle without using the remote keyless entry the settings for the last identified driver will be recalled when you put the ignition in ACCESSORY or RUN To program a personal choice climate control setting do the following 1 Choose a temperature setting for the driver and if desired for the passenger See Electronic Climate Control System Option earlier in this section 2 Adjust the fan speed and the direction of the airflow 3 Locate the memory buttons on the driver s door panel 4 Press a memory button 1 or 2 until you hear two beeps The beeps confirm that your selection has been saved and can now be recalled Follow these steps each time you want to change the stored settings For more information on the memory feature see Memory Seat and Mirrors in the Index Audio Systems Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all of its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced eng
60. by pressing the RESET button and store them to memory by pressing the SELECT button You can also program this feature to recall your memory seat position or the exit seat position Memory Position Choose ON when the SEAT RECALL choice appears and then choose MEMORY when the RECALL POSITION choice appears Exit Position Choose ON when the SEAT RECALL choice appears and then choose EXIT when the RECALL POSITION choice appears The seat will move when you enter the vehicle after unlocking it with a remote keyless entry transmitter This will allow for easy entry For more information on this feature see Memory Seat and Mirrors in the Index 2 108 Parallel Park Assist If Equipped The parallel park assist mirror which tips the passenger mirror while the vehicle is in REVERSE R can be made active or inactive through the DIC When TILT MIRROR OFF ON appears on the display use the RESET button to toggle the arrow between OFF and ON When you have made your choice press the SELECT button to record your selection For more information on this feature see Mirrors in the Index Driver ID This feature displays the DRIVER ID as identified by the DIC If this feature is ON the DRIVER ID will be displayed every time the ignition is turned on If the DRIVER ID is OFF the DRIVER ID can be displayed by pressing either a button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or a memory seat button Head Up Display
61. enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transaxle in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake NOTICE If you leave your radio on it could be badly damaged The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or in the accessory power outlet Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren t needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save your radio 5 4 4 Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive and the negative terminal locations on that vehicle Open the hood on your vehicle and find the remote positive terminal located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Access the remote positive terminal by removing the cover You will not see the battery of your vehicle under the hood It is located under the rear passenger s seat You
62. entering your vehicle This is helpful when you are trying to quickly cool the interior of the vehicle or to limit odors entering the vehicle RECIRC may be selected in all manual airflow modes except FRONT defrost If you select RECIRC while in defrost the RECIRC light will flash to let you know that this is not allowed This is to help prevent fogging When the weather is cool or damp operating in RECIRC for extended periods of time may cause fogging of the vehicle s windows To clear the fog switch back to outside air by turning off RECIRC select either defog or FRONT defrost mode and increase the fan speed To avoid refogging of the windows minimize your use of recirculation under these conditions and turn the A C on to help dehumidify the air z A C Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning compressor on and off The system will cool and dehumidify the air inside your vehicle If your comfort control system is off you can also turn it back on in vent mode by selecting the A C button Even though A C is not selected in FRONT defrost mode the A C compressor will run automatically at temperatures over approximately 40 F 4 C to improve windshield clearing performance Electronic Climate Control System Option DRIVER Driver s Side Temperature The knob on the left is used to change the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver s side of the vehicle Push this knob to
63. feature is available if you would like to manually calibrate Sometimes strong magnetic fields can affect the compass If the compass display does not show a direction and CALIBRATE COMPASS is displayed on the DIC try calibrating the compass as follows 1 Drive the vehicle to an open flat area 2 Press MODE to display COMPASS CALIBRATION 2 101 3 Press SELECT to display PRESS RESET TO RECALIBRATE and then press the RESET button 4 The display will change to SLOWLY DRIVE IN SMALL CIRCLES Drive the vehicle in small circles Don t drive faster than 10 mph 16 km h 5 Continue to drive in circles until the CALIBRATION COMPLETE is displayed on the DIC and a direction is shown for the compass Your compass should be calibrated You will know this when a direction is shown and the CALIBRATE COMPASS message is no longer displayed Compass Accuracy Your compass may show different headings around bridges power lines large metal objects and steep hills This is normal and is true of compasses in general If you put large metal objects like golf clubs in the trunk they could affect accuracy If the affect is minimal the compass will adapt to these objects over time If you use an antenna with a magnetic base it is best to mount it away from the center of the trunk near the rear window 2 102 The rear defog system can affect accuracy and the compass corrects for the rear defog However if the rear defog is turn
64. in miles per hour mph or kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada The speedometer shows a top speed of 140 mph 220 km h This is not intended to be the vehicle s top speed Your vehicle is equipped with a tamper resistant odometer If you see ERROR displayed you ll know that someone has probably tried to turn it back You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then it must be But if it can t then it s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven since you last reset it To set it to zero press the trip reset button next to the instrument panel cluster on the right side 2 75 Tachometer The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm SECURITY SERVICE SERVICE ENGINE SOON VEHICLE SOON NOTICE Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the shaded area or engine damage may occur 2 76 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal
65. in the pressure of one tire After the system has been properly calibrated the TIRE PRESS light will come on if a pressure difference low pressure is detected in one tire TIRE PRESS The light will stay on until you turn off the ignition or reset calibrate the system See Check Tire Pressure System in the Index The TIRE PRESS light also comes on briefly when you turn your ignition key to START If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be there to tell you if the pressure in a tire is low If the anti lock brake system warning light comes on the check tire pressure system may not be working properly See your dealer for service Also see Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index On vehicles with the optional Driver Information Center DIC a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message replaces the TIRE PRESS light when the system detects a pressure difference low pressure in one tire See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information 2 85 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service Engine Soon Light Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the ENGINE SOON fuel ignition and emission control systems SERVICE This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The SERVICE ENGINE SO
66. killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchorage points or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System 1 Find the anchors for the seating position you want to use where the bottom of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle The child restraint instructions will show you how traint See S Child R oe 4 If the child restraint is forward facing attach the oe eee ae plea ToN estraint m i top strap to the top strap anchor See Top Strap Rear Seat Position in the Index for information in the Index Tighten the top strap according to the on how to secure a child restraint in your vehicle child restraint instructions ing the vehicle s saf lts eg on ys using Hie velneressately Nels 5 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint simply unhook the top strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the anchor points 1 48 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position a e 7 If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH in the Index A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly inju
67. less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the
68. manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig And never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes Does your trailer have its own brakes Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Because you have anti lock brakes do not try to tap into your vehicles brake system If you do both brake systems won t work well or at all 4 37 Trailer Wiring Harness All of the electrical circuits required for your trailer lighting system can be accessed at the driver s side rear lamp connector This connector is located under the carpet on the rear corner of your trunk compartment Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then app
69. master and VALET key have a transponder in the key head that matches a decoder in the vehicle s instrument panel If a replacement key or any additional key is needed you must purchase this key from your dealer The key will have PK3 stamped on it Keep the bar code tag that came with the original keys Give this tag to your dealer if you need a new key made Any new PASS Key III key must be programmed before it will start your vehicle See PASS Key Ti in the Index for more information on programming your new key If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar System Door Locks with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle OnStar may be able to send a command to unlock your vehicle See OnStar in the Index for more information NOTICE Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft But you can have a lot of Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle won t open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren t locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in So be sure you have extra keys whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unabl
70. must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick is located behind the engine cooling fans and in front of the engine oil fill cap The top of the dipstick is a round yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you don t the oil dipstick might not show the actual level Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level Add engine oil at the engine oil fill cap near the oil dipstick See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD mark then you Il need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications in the Index NOTICE Don t add too much oil If your engine has so Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you re through much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged 6 13 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identif
71. on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing Channels To erase all three programmed channels hold down the two outside buttons on HomeLink until the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds Release both buttons Resetting Defaults To reset HomeLink to default settings hold down the two outside buttons on HomeLink until the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds Continue to hold the buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off and then release both buttons Accessories Accessories for HomeLink are available If you would like additional information please contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com 2 69 The Instrument Panel Your Information System The main components of your instrument panel are the following A Air Outlets B Turn Signal Multifunction Lever C Audio System Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped D Windshield Wiper Lever E Steering Column Shift Lever F Driver Information Center DIC Controls If Equipped G Audio System H Hazard Warning Flashers Control I Twilight Sentinel Controls and Fog Lamps Button J Ignition Switch K Comfort Control System L Heated Seat Switches Option M Traction Control Button If Equipped N Cigarette Lighter O Glove Box 2 71 Instrument Panel Clusters The instrument panel clusters are designed to let you know at a glance how you
72. or others could be injured Don t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you ve moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you or if you have the console shift lever without first pushing the button If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transaxle into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the Index When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P Shifting Out of PARK P Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift l
73. or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tires Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty 6 63 Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed accelerated corrosion rust can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection 6 64 At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do t
74. portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 1 52 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 6 To tighten the belt feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 1 53 Older Children Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A If possible an older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Accident statistics show that children a
75. start your vehicle The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem On vehicles with the DIC a SERVICE AIR BAG message will be displayed when there is a problem with the air bag system See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information Battery Warning Light If Equipped This light will come on briefly when you start the vehicle as a check to show you it is working then it should go out If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the electrical charging system Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery and result in a vehicle that may stall If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and comfort control system Some instrument panel clusters with a voltmeter gage do not have a battery warning light They have a CHECK GAGES warning to indicate a problem On vehicles with a DIC a CHECK CHARGE SYSTEM message will be displayed and a warning chime will sound See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information Voltmeter If Equipped You have a voltmeter unless you have the supercharged engine WALL D Ss 8 l youts 18 When the ignition is running the gage shows
76. system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered by your warranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you ll be driving Filling Your Tank Gasoline vapor is highly flammable It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries Don t smoke if you re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from gasoline The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver s side of your vehicle While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap on the hook on the inside of the fuel door To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if you let go of the cap too soon it will spring back to the right If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wa
77. that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center DIC that works along with the warning lights and gages See Driver Information Center in the Index The volume of your vehicle s warning chimes can be adjusted For more information see Chime Level Adjustment in the Index Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to ON or START a chime w
78. the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down If you have Stabilitrak you may see the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the Driver Information Center See Stability System Active Message in the Index Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway 4 11 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in this section It is better to remove as much spee
79. the driver s and front passenger s window switch is pushed all the way rearward the window will lower completely The window can be opened in smaller amounts by pressing the switch rearward slightly to the first stop To stop the window while it is lowering in the express mode press the switch again then release it To raise the window hold the switch forward Window Lock Press the LOCK button on the driver s door armrest to disable all of the passenger window switches If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC you can also set this feature to only lock out the rear window switches See Driver Information Center DIC in the Index All driver s window switches will still be operable Press the LOCK button again to allow passengers to use their window switches An indicator light in the button will glow when the window lock feature is active Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with children There is a master key that works in all of the lock cylinders driver s door trunk ignition and glove box There is also a VALET key which only operates the driver s door and the ignition Your vehicle has the PASS Key III vehicle theft system Both the
80. there until you complete your lane change The lever will return by itself when you release it If the arrows flash very fast as you signal a turn or a lane change a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won t see your turn signal If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident See Bulb Replacement in the Index If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal To turn off the chime move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam push the lever forward To change from high beam to low beam pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it When the high beams are on this light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on 2 41 Lamps On Reminder If you open the driver s door while leaving the headlamps or parking lamps on and the key is in OFF you will hear a warning chime Flash To Pass Feature This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are off To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you If your headlamps are off or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on
81. turn the system on and off Turn the knob toward the blue area to decrease the set temperature Turn the knob toward the red area to increase the set temperature When this knob is adjusted the word DRIVER will be displayed under the set temperature When the passenger s set temperature is not active this knob controls both the driver s and passenger s side and both DRIVER and PASS will be displayed under the set temperature PASS Passenger s Side Temperature The knob on the right is used to change the temperature of the air coming through the system on the passenger s side of the vehicle Push this knob to turn the system on and off Turn the knob toward the blue area to decrease the set temperature Turn the knob toward the red area to increase the set temperature When this knob is adjusted only the word PASS will be displayed under the set temperature SB Fan The button with the fan symbol allows you to manually adjust the fan speed Press the HIGH side to increase fan speed and the LOW side to decrease fan speed MODE Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the choices on the display to select the air delivery mode of airflow into the vehicle The system will stay in the selected mode until MODE is pressed again or until the AUTO button is pressed e FLOOR This setting directs most of the airflow to the floor ducts e DEFOG This setting directs most of the airflow to the floor ducts and the
82. use only DOT 3 brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid 6 32 NOTICE Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they ll have to be replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear
83. which you can remove the key This position locks your ignition and transaxle It s a theft deterrent feature Your vehicle doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Don t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Don t tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information NOTICE If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can t turn it be sure you are using the correct key if so is it all the way in Turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch If none of this works then your vehicle needs service 2 26 ACC Accessory In this position you can operate your electrical accessories such as power windows sunroof option audio system and windshield wipers ON This is the position the switch returns to after you start your engine and release the switch Even when the engine is not running you can use ON to operate your electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster
84. will not need to access the battery for jump starting The remote positive terminal is for that purpose An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You don t need to add water to the ACDelco battery installed in every new GM vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you don t explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
85. your safety belt properly Head Restraints Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash On some models the head restraints tilt forward and rearward also Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts And it explains the air bag system Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index In most states and Canadi
86. 0 000 Miles 50 000 km Supercharger Oil Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Automatic Check or every 36 months whichever occurs first Transaxle Service normal conditions 5800 Code I V6 engine oniy Engime Air Cleaner Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Filter Replacement Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transaxle P These intervals only summarize maintenance services Service severe conditions only Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages 7 7 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be repeated after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals for the life of this vehicle The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be repeated at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km for the life of this vehicle See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following 7 8 Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded
87. 2 4 Keys 2 40 Tilt Wheel 2 6 Door Locks 2 40 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 2 13 Remote Keyless Entry System If Equipped 2 47 Exterior Lamps 2 18 Trunk 2 51 Interior Lamps 2 20 Theft 2 55 Mirrors 2 21 Universal Theft Deterrent If Equipped 2 57 Storage Compartments 2 23 PASS Key III 2 59 Air Inflator System Option 2 26 New Vehicle Break In 2 62 OnStar System If Equipped 2 26 Ignition Positions 2 65 Express Sunroof Option 2 28 Starting Your Engine 2 66 HomeLink Transmitter If Equipped 2 29 Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped 2 70 The Instrument Panel Your 2 30 Automatic Transaxle Operation Information System 2 33 Parking Brake 2 76 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 2 34 Shifting Into PARK P 2 96 Driver Information Center DIC 2 37 Shifting Out of PARK P If Equipped 2 38 Parking Over Things That Burn 2 109 Head Up Display HUD Option 2 38 Engine Exhaust Windows Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Power Windows Switches on the driver s door panel operate each of the windows when the ignition is on or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active In addition each passenger door has a switch for its own window Express Down Windows When
88. 26 4 13 Passing 4 30 4 15 Loss of Control 4 32 4 16 Driving at Night 4 34 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads City Driving Freeway Driving Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Winter Driving Recreational Vehicle Towing Loading Your Vehicle Towing a Trailer Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It s the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call reading or reaching for something on the floor makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pu
89. 63 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 8 5 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details When calling from outside Canada please dial 1 905 644 3063 All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 8 6 Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program Security While You Travel 1 800 ROADSIDE 1 800 762
90. 7 4 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 35 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 8 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 7 37 Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 22 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7 39 Part E Maintenance Record IMPORTANT KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details 7 2 Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehicle properly Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals checks inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty How This Section is Organized This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Main
91. A Remove the oil fill tube with cap attached from the valve cover B Insert the catch tab on the cover shield under the bracket on the engine C Place the hole in the cover shield over the hole in the valve cover Install oil fill tube and cap by twisting clockwise D If you have the supercharged engine install the nut in the center of the cover shield 5 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture up to the base of the filler neck See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air bleed valve close the valve Otherwise close the valve after the radiator is filled 6 Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine and the compartment 5 18 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL 10 COLD mark Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank but leave the radiator pressure cap off 11 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fans By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck 12 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the pressure cap
92. AL The radio will also display brackets around the PTY when the PTY interrupt is active To disable the PTY interrupt select the interrupt format and press and hold the PROG TYPE button until you hear a beep The asterisk will be removed from the display and so will the brackets When you are listening to a cassette tape or a compact disc the last selected RDS FM station will interrupt play if that selected PTY format is broadcast AM FM Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same programming Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations Setting Preset PTY Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite Program Types PTYs These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets You can set up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2 Press PROG TYPE if it is not already on Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the PTY you set will return oe 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton RDS Messages ALERT This type of
93. AY knob located to the left of the steering column on the instrument panel fully clockwise for the three minute delay Turn it counterclockwise to reduce the delay Turn the knob to OFF to turn the Twilight Sentinel off At night you can turn off all exterior lamps when you are in PARK P by turning the Twilight Sentinel knob all the way to OFF If the knob was already in OFF it must be cycled to ON then back to OFF to turn the exterior lighting off The lamps will come back on when you turn the knob clockwise 2 50 If the Twilight Sentinel lighting is active it can be disabled by turning on the manual parking lamps This lighting will be disabled until the key is turned from ON or until the manual parking lamps are turned off Also it s possible that your headlamps may go out if you drive from a dark area into a bright area like a lighted parking lot If this happens turn on your headlamps with the exterior lamp control Exterior Lighting Battery Saver If the exterior lamp control has been left on the exterior lamps will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF and a door has been opened This protects against draining the battery in case you have accidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on If you need to leave the lamps on for more than 10 minutes use the exterior lamp control to turn the lamps back on after turning the ignition to OFF and opening a door To delay the lamps from turni
94. Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Pontiac by dialing 1 800 833 PONT 7668 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to Pontiac the letter should be addressed to Pontiac s Customer Assistance Center United States Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 1 800 762 2737 or 1 800 833 7668 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 ROADSIDE 762 3743 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 2
95. CE If your vehicle has a tire size other than P235 55R17 size tires use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use only SAE Class S type chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you re cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too 6 57 Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle e Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Red
96. CIRC turned off That will force outside air into your vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust in the Index Trunk Lock Release To unlock the trunk from the outside insert the master key and turn it Remote Trunk Release Option If you have this option press the trunk release button located in the glove box to open the trunk lid The key does not have to be in the ignition for the remote trunk button to work The transaxle must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N The system also works with the remote keyless entry system if your vehicle has this feature Remote Trunk Release Lockout Option To secure items in the trunk lock the glove box with the master key and take your key and remote keyless entry transmitter with you The valet key cannot open the trunk or the glovebox Trunk Security Override Option Pressing the trunk symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter opens the trunk even if the glove box is locked 2 19 Trunk Release Handle Pe Your vehicle may be equipped with a trunk release handle Some early production vehicles may not have this feature NOTICE The trunk release handle was not designed to be used to tie down the trunk lid or as an anchor point when securing items in the trunk Improper use of the trunk release handle could damage it 2 20 If yo
97. F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km 51 000 Miles 85 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote 54 000 Miles 90 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 7 15 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 57 000 Miles 95 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter a e E Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service For supercharged engine
98. For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at Pontiac GMC Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 4 35 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 36 If you re using a weight carrying hitch or a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some item
99. In an emergency situation press the emergency service button Upon receiving the call an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and assess the situation If necessary the advisor will alert the nearest emergency service provider Communication Button Press this button at the end of a call Also press this button to answer a call from the center or cancel a call if one of the other buttons is accidentally pressed This button is also used to access OnStar Personal Calling and Virtual Advisor services See the OnStar owner package for more information Volume Control You can control the volume of the OnStar System using either the volume control knob on the radio or using the steering wheel volume control if equipped Telltale Light This light will indicate the status of the system A solid green light will come on when you start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on and is ready to make or receive calls If the light blinks green it means that an incoming or outgoing call is in progress Press the Communication button if you notice the light blinking and you are not on a call The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system malfunction If this occurs press the OnStar button to attempt to contact an advisor If the connection is made the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make sure that the system is functioning properly If you cannot contact the advisor take your vehicle to your dea
100. K GAGES OIL PRESSURE message will be displayed and a warning chime will sound See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty 2 89 Check Oil Level Warning Light If Equipped The CHECK OIL LEVEL light is part of the systems monitor This light comes on for five seconds as a bulb check each time the ignition key is turned to ON 7 CHECK OIL LEVEL If the engine oil is more than 1 0 quart 0 9 L low and the engine has been shut off for at least eight minutes the CHECK OIL LEVEL light will come on and a chime will sound the next time you start your vehicle If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light comes on the engine oil level should be checked at the dipstick then brought up to the proper level if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index On vehicles with a DIC the CHECK OIL LEVEL light is replaced by an OIL LEVEL LOW message See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information 2 90 Service Vehicle Soon Light If Equipped This light will come on briefly as a bulb check when your ignition is VEHICLE SOON e4 t ON SERVICE This light will
101. LE A se a CCDA 5 a PO Olfs Clea Cyto 61 59 7 Qs 1045 1014 0413 aae m ak YOOO 57 a EEE 2 Cocca aaan J Minifuse Usage 1 Fuel Pump 2 Heater Ventilation Air Conditioning Blower 3 Memory Seat 4 Assembly Line Diagnostic Link 5 Not Used 6 Compact Disc CD 6 74 Minifuse 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Usage Driver Door Module Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Not Used Lamps Park Right Ventilation Solenoid Ignition 1 Lamps Park Left Interior Lamp Dimmer Module Not Used Heated Seat Left Front Not Used Rear Door Modules Stoplamps PARK P REVERSE R Audio Retained Accessory Power Minifuse 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Usage Not Used Not Used Passenger Door Module Body Interior Lamps Not Used Ignition Switch Instrument Panel Heated Seat Right Front Not Used Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Ignition 3 Rear Antilock Brake System Turn Signal Hazard HVAC Battery Dash Integration Module Micro Relay 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Usage Fuel Pump Parking Lamps Ignition 1 Rear Fog Lamps Not Used Park Brake Reverse Lamps Retained Accessory Power Fuel Tank Door Lock Not Used Ignition 3 Fuel Tank Door Release Interior Lamps Trunk Release Front Courtesy Lamps Not Used Electronic Level Control Compressor 6 75 Circuit Br
102. Maintenance 42 000 Miles 70 000 km Ls Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation FP pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY ene SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter a S Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote 48 000 Miles 80 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL a i SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation a S pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 7 14 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven Ee SERVICED BY under one or more of these conditions CL J In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90
103. Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work ona vehicle without knowing enough about it Besure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies your engine You will find the VIN at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number in the Index Gasoline Octane If your vehicle has the 3800 V6 engine VIN Code K use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If it is bad enough it can damage your engine A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher o
104. NNNNWN me O00 ON 6 34 6 36 6 45 6 46 6 57 6 58 6 60 6 61 6 63 6 65 6 66 6 67 6 71 6 77 6 77 6 78 Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Care of Safety Belts Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle Sheet Metal Damage GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Vehicle Identification Number VIN Electrical System Removing the Rear Seat Cushion Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco n T NINE adele Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you ll want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See
105. ON light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction 2 86 NOTICE If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty NOTICE Modifications made to the engine transaxle exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emis
106. ONN NDURU DO AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio Data System RDS If Equipped Trunk Mounted CD Changer Option Theft Deterrent Feature Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped Understanding Radio Reception Tips About Your Audio System Care of Your Cassette Tape Player Care of Your Compact Discs Care of Your Compact Disc Player Diversity Antenna System Chime Level Adjustment Comfort Controls This section tells you how to make your air system work for you With this system you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle Your vehicle also has a flow through ventilation system described later in this section Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger compartment air filter For more information see Passenger Compartment Air Filter in the Index Standard Climate Control System FAN The left knob regulates the force of the air coming through the system Push this knob to turn the fan on and off Turn the knob clockwise toward HI to increase the fan speed and counterclockwise toward LO to decrease the fan speed The fan must be on in order for the air conditioning compressor to run TEMP Temperature The right knob regulates the temperature of the air coming through the system Turn it toward the blue area for cooler air Turn it toward the red area for warmer air Mode Buttons You may choose the direction of air d
107. RDRIVE D Here are some times you might choose THIRD 3 instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D When driving on hilly winding roads when towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears or when going down a steep hill 2 32 SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on NOTICE Don t drive in SECOND 2 for more than 5 miles 8 km or at speeds over 55 mph 90 km h or you can damage your transaxle Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D or THIRD 3 as much as possible Don t shift into SECOND 2 unless you are going slower than 65 mph 105 km h or you can damage your engine FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in FIRST 1 the transaxle won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough NOTICE If your front wheels will not turn don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage your transaxle Also if you stop when going uphill don t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal This could overheat and damage the transaxle Use your brakes or shift in
108. SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM BD eilnene sees CHECK GAGES OIL PRESSURE E PEI bs Katha ate es dane OIL LEVEL LOW IT ee aai BRAKE FLUID LOW O E ALARM OCCURRED 44 CHECK GAGES TEMPERATURE 94 ebada eden SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM 95 Ptangneeanerdietss STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE OL a bisa E E E E CHECK GAS CAP EXP Export ID Warning Message EEEN ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON 83 E EEA A TEE SERVICE AIR BAG 102 Ae ne ace teakees CHECK CHARGE SYSTEM TAO e ceeetionsepes P DRIVER DOOR AJAR 141 FRONT PASSENGER DOOR AJAR VAD sessing ook ae eb LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR TAB cries ally hee SEM RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR TAA seecatiosccp eieaack wat CHECK TIRE PRESSURE VAT o5 howd PEE EEE PARK BRAKE SET The EXP codes are used to make translation from English to other languages easier Pressing any of the DIC control buttons will remove the above messages or warnings from the DIC display unless noted by an asterisk SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM 54 If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message it means there may be a problem with your stability enhancement system If you see this message try to reset the system stop turn off the engine then start the engine again If the SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your dealer for service Reduce your speed and drive accordingly 2 99 STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE 55 You may see the STABILITY SYSTEM ACTIVE message on the
109. Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid 6 21 Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Athigh speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to drive longer 6 22 Checking the Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle as follows Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift
110. Step 4 2 10 3 Cycle the parking lamp switch from off to on six times On the sixth cycle the doors will unlock to confirm that the feature has been turned on Your doors will remain locked if delayed locking is off If the doors unlock delayed locking is on 4 To change modes cycle the parking lamp switch once more A locking action will confirm the new mode 5 Release the power door lock switch To turn the feature off repeat the previous procedure If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry your vehicle can be programmed to each driver s preference for each of the transmitters Use the following procedure to turn the feature off using the corresponding transmitter 1 Keep all doors closed the vehicle in PARK P and the ignition on throughout this procedure 2 Press and hold the power door lock switch in LOCK throughout this procedure All the doors will lock 3 Press the button with the unlock symbol on the transmitter The lock delay is still on and all the doors will unlock 4 Press the button with the unlock symbol on the transmitter again Lock delay is now off and all the doors will lock 5 Release the power door lock switch To turn this feature on repeat the previous procedure This procedure changes the mode for only the transmitter used to change this setting The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
111. TICE Although the HUD image appears to be near the front of the vehicle do not use it as a parking rena aid The HUD was not designed for that purpose The HUD controls are located to the left of the If you try to use it that way such as in a parking steering column lot you may misjudge distance and run 1 Start your engine and turn the HUD INTENSITY into something knob all of the way clockwise to MAX Maximum The brightness of the HUD image is determined by ambient light and where you have set the HUD INTENSITY knob 2 110 2 Adjust the seat if necessary before setting the height using the IMAGE switch Press and hold the top of the IMAGE switch raising the HUD image as far as possible Then press on the bottom of the HUD IMAGE switch to move the image down so the image is as low as possible but in full view 3 Turn the INTENSITY knob counterclockwise until the HUD image is no brighter than necessary To turn the HUD off turn the HUD INTENSITY knob all the way counterclockwise If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy or if you turn on your headlamps you may need to adjust the HUD brightness using the HUD INTENSITY knob Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image Spray household glass cleaner on a soft clean cloth Wipe the HUD lens gently then dry i
112. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spring and fall You should let your dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage tears or leakage Replace seals if necessary Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust in the Index 7 35 Fuel System Inspection Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspec
113. The knob that controls this feature is located on the outboard side of each front seat Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase lumbar support Turn the knob toward the rear of the vehicle to decrease lumbar support If you have the independent front cushion moved down as far as it will go you may feel the lumbar support higher in your back Readjust the position of the cushion until you are comfortable You may also want to adjust the seatback for maximum comfort Power Seats If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature the controls for the power seats are located on the outboard side of each front seat To adjust the power seats do the following Horizontal Control Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by pressing the forward edge of the control up or down Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by pressing the rear edge of the control up or down Move the seat forward or rearward by pressing the control towards the front or rear of the vehicle Move the seat higher or lower by holding the whole control up or down Vertical Control Option Move the seatback into a recline position by pressing the top of the control backward Move the seatback forward by pressing the top of the control forward Power Lumbar Control Option If your vehicle has this option the lumbar control is located on the outboard side of each front seat Use the power seat control first to get the pr
114. UNE Turn this knob to choose radio stations A SEEK V Press the up or down arrow to go to the next or previous station and stay there The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while seeking A SCAN V Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep The radio will go to a station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning To scan preset stations press and hold one of the SCAN arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the preset number appear on the display You will hear a double beep The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station This feature will only scan the six presets that are in the selected band Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning presets The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning 3 21 Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press EQ to select the equaliza
115. Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle take your keys open your door and set the locks from the inside Then get out and close the door You may also use the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter after shutting the doors If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system see Universal Theft Deterrent in the Index Remote Keyless Entry System If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature you can lock and unlock your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle Your remote keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notic
116. Warning Light in the Index TRUNK AJAR DOOR AJAR This message means that either the Sa driver s door or one of the passenger s doors is not completely closed If this light comes on see Door Ajar Light in the Index When you turn the ignition on the systems monitor and warning lights will briefly light up If a problem is o TIRE PRESS This message means one or more of detected the warning lights will turn on and a chime your tires may be low See Check Tire Pressure will sound System in the Index CHECK GAGES This means one or more of your gages may be in their respective warning bands If this light comes on see Check Gages Warning Light in the Index TRUNK AJAR This message means your trunk is not completely closed 2 94 The following buttons are on the systems monitor control panel which is located to the right of the instrument panel cluster E M English Metric Use this button to change the display between English and metric units TRIP RESET This button allows you to reset your trip odometer To reset the trip odometer press the TRIP RESET button The trip odometer will now accumulate miles kilometers until the next reset TIRE PRESS RESET This button allows you to reset the check tire pressure system To reset the system or for more information see Check Tire Pressure System in the Index 2 95 Driver Information Center DIC If Equipped
117. When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio station or a related network station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing If the compact disc player was being used the compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped Radio Messages CALIBRATE Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If CALIBRATE appears on the display it means that your radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to the dealership for service Playing a Compact Disc With the ignition on insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing If you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off first press the eject symbol or push the RCL knob If you insert a CD with the radio off and the ignition on it will start to play When the disc is inserted the CD symbol will be displayed If you select an EQ setting for your CD it will be activated each time you play a CD As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section gt 1 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release it to play the passage The display will show elapsed time RDM 3 Random Press this pushb
118. Your vehicle may have a Driver Information Center DIC The DIC will display information about how your vehicle is functioning as well as warning messages if a system problem is detected DIC Displays and Controls There are two lines in the DIC display The bottom line on the display area is left blank when the DIC displays the driver number identified when entering the vehicle C x COMPASS gt R DRIVER INFORMATION GEDE G8 Gb RE 85 88 88 G6 BE 2 96 You can have your dealer program your name to replace the driver identifier See your dealer for more information When you turn the ignition on the DIC will display your DRIVER NUMBER which corresponds to the number on the back of the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped The system will then perform a status check and display any messages if a problem is detected If there are no problems detected the display will return to the mode selected by that driver the last time the ignition was turned off If a problem is detected a diagnostic message will appear in the display The following information will show the messages you may see on the DIC display The message center is continuously updated with the vehicle s performance status The following buttons are on the DIC control panel which is located to the right of the instrument panel cluster E M English Metric This button allows you to change the display between English a
119. a PTY is not displayed the first time seek is pressed the last selected PTY will be displayed Press the SEEK up arrow again to seek If a station with the selected PTY is not found NOT FOUND will appear on the display To use the PTY interrupt feature press and hold PROG TYPE until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt An asterisk will appear next to the PTY name for example CLASSICAL The radio will also display brackets around the PTY when the PTY interrupt is active To disable the PTY interrupt select the interrupt format and press and hold the PROG TYPE button until you hear a beep The asterisk will be removed from the display and so will the brackets When you are listening to a compact disc the last selected RDS FM station will interrupt play if that selected PTY format is broadcast AM FM Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same programming Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations Setting Preset PTY Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite Program Types PTYs These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets You can set up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 by per
120. a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D or THIRD 3 If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there s still no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away 5 11 Cooling System When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what you ll see A Coolant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Electric Engine Cooling Fans 5 12 An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling don t do anything else until it cools down The vehicle should be parked on a level surface See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark if the engine is hot the coolant level should be at FULL HOT If it isn t you may have a leak at the
121. ake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Traction Control System If Equipped Your vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may reengage the cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index This light should come on briefly when you start the engine If it stays on or comes on while you a
122. an provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They work You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have a crash you don t know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider doesn t stop The person keeps going until stopped by something or the instrument panel In a real vehicle it could be the windshield Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt A You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted or the safety belts With safety belts you slow d
123. ap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part 1 33 z i You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is ees Zs too loose In a crash you would move forward gt N Sa too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body g Ai A ON i h Cy N yy a KC Hie YS G p x ib aa a The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And yov d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle 1 34 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Here s how to install a comfort guide and use the Children and Small Adults ately Belt Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide better positions the belt away
124. appen to move past a selection you would like to make a personal choice for press unlock on your transmitter or press the appropriate driver number on the memory seat control This will return you to the beginning of the option feature programming mode A description of each feature programmable through the DIC follows Automatic Door Locks The door lock modes when shifting in and out of PARK P can be changed through the DIC You can change these modes using different selections of the following DIC displays AUTO DOOR LOCKS OFF ON UNLOCK OFF ON UNLOCK KEY OFF PARK DOOR TO UNLOCK DRIVER ALL If you choose OFF for AUTO DOOR LOCKS your door locks will operate normally with no automatic feature If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS ON for UNLOCK and KEY OFF your doors will lock every time you shift out of PARK P and the doors will unlock every time you stop and turn the ignition to OFF If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS ON for UNLOCK and PARK your doors will lock every time you shift out of PARK P and the doors will unlock every time you stop and shift into PARK P If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS and OFF for UNLOCK your doors will lock every time you shift out of PARK P and there will be no automatic door unlock when shifting back into PARK P If you choose ON for UNLOCK and DRIVER for DOOR TO UNLOCK only the driver s door will automatically unlock when shifting into PARK
125. are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits use the recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Selecting the Right Schedule First you ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle Here s how to decide which schedule to follow Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip City Definition Follow the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle Most trips are less than 5 miles 8 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle If the vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner Short Trip City Intervals Every 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or 3 months whichever occurs first Every 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Tire Rotation Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection if driving in dusty conditions Passenger Compartment Air Filter Replacement if equipped Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Supercharger Oil Check or every 36 mon
126. at s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers 4 28 If You re Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turn on your hazard flashers e Tie ared cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothing make body Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can t see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaus
127. atures and controls for your vehicle In this manual you ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen iii Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices NOTICE These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle In the notice area we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE iv Vehicle Symbols Your vehicle may be equipped with components and labels that use sy
128. automatically unlock when the key is turned to OFF DIC equipped vehicles only If your vehicle is not equipped with remote keyless entry use the following procedure to change modes 1 Keep all doors closed the vehicle in PARK P and the ignition on throughout this procedure 2 Press and hold the driver s power door lock switch in LOCK through Step 3 3 Cycle the shift lever starting in PARK P out of PARK P and then back into PARK P to advance by one mode for each cycle After the first cycle you will hear a door locking action which identifies the current mode 4 Release the power door lock switch The automatic door locks will remain in the most recent mode selected If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry use the following procedure to change modes 1 2 Keep all doors closed the vehicle in PARK P and the ignition on throughout this procedure Press and hold the driver s power door lock switch in LOCK through Step 4 Press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter The automatic door locks will remain in the current mode Press the button with the lock symbol on the transmitter again Each time the transmitter s lock button is pressed the mode will advance by one going from 3 to 0 to 1 etc The door locks will cycle according to the mode entered Mode 0 has no feedback Release the power door lock switch The automatic d
129. be opened manually in case of an electrical power failure The release mechanism is on the driver s side of the vehicle at the top of the trunk compartment Pull the tab to release the fuel door NOTICE Prying on a locked fuel filler door can damage it Use the remote fuel door manual release located in the trunk in the case of a power failure Filling a Portable Fuel Container Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Don t smoke while pumping gasoline Checking Things Under the Hood An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like gasoline oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be carefu
130. before using them If your blades do become damaged get new blades or blade inserts See Wiper Blade Replacement in the Index Windshield Washer At the end of the wiper lever there s a button To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the button until you have enough fluid to clean the windshield The wipers will clear the window and either stop or return to your preset speed In freezing weather don t use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision A WASHER FLUID warning light will indicate if the fluid level in the windshield washer reservoir is low See Low Washer Fluid Warning Light in the Index 2 43 Cruise Control With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips ase The cruise control switch is located on the lever on the left side of the OFF ON RA _ steering column Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When you apply your brakes the cruise control shuts off 2 44 Cruise control can be dangerous where you can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning
131. bulb Push the bulb assembly in and turn it clockwise to install the bulb assembly into the headlamp assembly Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system equipped with horizontal aim indicators The aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment This is true even though your horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the 0 zero marks on their scales If your vehicle is damaged in an accident the headlamp aim may be affected Aim adjustment to the low beam may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers for horizontal aim or if oncoming drivers flash their high beams at you for vertical aim If you believe your headlamps need to be re aimed we recommend that you take your vehicle to your dealer for service However it is possible for you to re aim your headlamps as described in the following procedure NOTICE To make sure your headlamps are aimed properly read all the instructions before beginning Failure to follow these instructions could cause damage to headlamp parts 6 38 The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft 7 6 m from a light colored wall or other flat surface The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly level surface which is level all the way to the wall or other flat surface The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat su
132. cator will light to show that the tone control can be adjusted When adjusting BASS MID or TREB turn the SELECT knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To adjust all of the tone controls to the middle position press and hold TONE until FLAT appears on the display EQ Equalizer This feature allows you to choose preset bass mid and treble equalization settings designed for different program types Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting Each time you press EQ another setting will appear on the display You can preset up to six equalization settings by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to select the desired equalization 3 Press and hold EQ for two seconds SELECT EQ will appear on the display The EQ icon will flash 4 Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the desired EQ number Each time you press EQ or turn the SELECT knob another EQ setting will appear on the display 5 Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT knob to store the equalization preset You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will appear on the display 6 Repeat the steps for each EQ setting EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with talk radio but it can be preset to a different tone Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL Balance Press and release th
133. ccordingly activates when the computer senses that your vehicle is just starting to spin as it might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road When the system is on you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal This is normal 2 83 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage wey 7 SS A 1 SK 200 ly S 90 100 emP 280 40 r c amp 140 United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature 2 84 To prevent engine overheating the air conditioning compressor will turn off automatically just prior to the gage pointer entering the shaded area As the engine cools down the air conditioning compressor will automatically turn back on On vehicles equipped with the DIC the message ENGINE HOT A C DISABLED will appear in the DIC display and a warning chime will sound If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area your engine is too hot On vehicles equipped with the systems monitor the CHECK GAGES light will come on and a warning chime will sound On vehicles with a DIC a CHECK GAGES TEMPERATURE message will be displayed and a warning chime will sound See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information The section Problems on the Road in this manual explains what to do if your engine overheats See Engine Overheating in the Index Tire Pressure Light If Equipped The check tire pressure system can alert you to a large change
134. ce Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires 6 52 Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels It s all right to drive with your compact spare though It was developed for use on your vehicle If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
135. cially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle Also see Traction Control System in the Index 4 6 Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be
136. ck the glove box Lock all doors except the driver s Give the valet key to the valet Then take the master key with you Universal Theft Deterrent If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature it has a theft deterrent alarm system With this system the SECURITY light will flash as you open the door if your ignition is in OFF This light on the instrument panel cluster reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system when leaving your vehicle SECURITY To activate the system do the following 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch while the door is open or use the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped The SECURITY light should come on and stay on 3 Close all doors The SECURITY light should go off after about 30 seconds and the system will then be armed 2 21 If the SECURITY light comes on for one minute and then shuts off while the ignition is on the security system has detected a problem See your dealer for service If a door is opened without the key or remote keyless entry transmitter or if the door key cylinders are damaged the alarm will go off The exterior lamps will flash and the horn will sound for 30 seconds then will go off in order to save battery power Remember the theft deterrent system won t activate if you lock the doors with a key or manual door lock It activates only if you use a power door lock switch while the door is open or t
137. ckle the should go over the shoulder and across the chest safety belt quickly if you ever had to These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor Oh i W gt lt 2 NK fa Fd 1 15 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body OOF E P A al F A SQ The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way 1 16 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 17 Q What s wrong with this The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 18 You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which w
138. come on and a warning chime will sound if you have a certain non emissions related vehicle problem These problems may not be so obvious and may not affect vehicle performance or durability Consult a qualified dealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicle performance On vehicles with the supercharged engine and a DIC the SERVICE VEHICLE SOON light is replaced by the SERVICE VEHICLE SOON message See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information Security Light This light on the instrument panel cluster reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system when leaving your vehicle See Universal Theft Deterrent in the Index for more information SECURITY Low Washer Fluid Warning Light If Equipped This light is part of the systems monitor It will come on and a warning chime will sound when the washer fluid container is less than one third full ZR WASHER ee FLUID On vehicles with a DIC the WASHER FLUID light is replaced by the WASHER FLUID LOW message See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information Check Gages Warning Light If Equipped This light is part of the systems monitor It will come on briefly as a bulb CHECK GAGES check when your ignition is turned to ON If this light comes on and stays on while you are driving check your gages for fuel coolant temperature oil pressure and voltage Door Ajar Light If Equipped This
139. condenser pressure cap and neck PF Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service SERVICED BY 7 30 Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index for further details Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures Don t forget to check your spare tire See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck
140. crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them CAUTION Continued 1 22 Frontal air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something They aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear or low speed frontal crashes or in many side crashes And for some unrestrained occupants frontal air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past The side impact air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle They aren t designed to inflate in frontal in rollover or in rear crashes Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating air bag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position for air bag inflation before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with frontal air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle
141. ctane fuel is necessary If your vehicle has the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine VIN Code1 use only premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 91 or higher In an emergency you may be able to use a lower octane as low as 87 if heavy knocking does not occur Refill your tank with premium fuel as soon as possible If you are using 91 octane or higher octane fuel and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service Gasoline Specifications It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines In Canada look for the Auto Makers Choice label on the pump Canada Only California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards see the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on see Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index and y
142. d as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available 4 12 An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery shoul
143. d be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway So here are some tips for passing Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it s all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic 4 13 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as
144. d wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or brok
145. ders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all hinges and latches including those for the hood rear compartment glove box door console door and any folding seat hardware Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Starter Switch Check Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control System Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular ona levelsurface brake See Parking Brake in the Index if necessary 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn in the Index if necessary off the engine immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The starter Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N the vehicle begins to move If the starter works in any other position your 3 With the engine off turn the key to the ON position vehicle needs service bu
146. ditional information See footnote See footnote 87 000 Miles 145 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add the proper supercharger oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 19 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 93 000 Miles 155 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE 96 000 Miles 160 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Rotate tir
147. e a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See the instructions that follow If you re still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service 2 13 Operation The driver s door will unlock and the exterior lamps may flash twice when the button with the unlock symbol is pressed The fuel door will also unlock when unlock is pressed if you have the optional fuel door lock If the button with the unlock symbol is pressed again within five seconds all the doors will unlock Pressing the unlock button will also illuminate the interior lamps See Illuminated Entry and Security Feedback in the Index 2 14 All doors will lock the exterior lamps may flash once and the horn may chirp when the button with the lock symbol is pressed See Security Feedback in the Index Pressing the lock button may also turn off the interior lamps if illuminated If you have the optional fuel door lock the fuel door will a
148. e about a hot engine on your vehicle s instrument panel See Coolant Temperature Gage and DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine 5 10 Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool NOTICE If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving Idle for long periods in traffic Tow atrailer If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If your air conditioner is on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary 3 If you re in
149. e air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions ooo Ee Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter 18 000 Miles 30 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE SRY i Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation o e E pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 21 000 Miles 35 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 11 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 24 000 Miles 40 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 27 000 Miles 45 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air f
150. e belt 5 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position y Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat Here s why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat 1 51 Although a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint See Seats in the Index 2 Put the restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder
151. e especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid don t overfill engine oil drive belt cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review this information before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions See Engine Overheating in the Index 4 41 y Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road 5 2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 12 Cooling System 5 2 Other Warning Devices 5 20 If a Tire Goes Flat 5 3 Jump Starting 5 21 Changing a Flat Tire 5 9 Towing Your Vehicle 5 31 Compact Spare Tire 5 9 Engine Overheating 5 32 If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 1 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off The hazard warning flasher button is located on the instrument panel between the audio system and the glove box Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off T
152. e new keys made To program additional keys you will need two current driver s keys You must add a step to the following procedure After Step 2 repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver s key Then continue with Step 3 To program the new key do the following 1 Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it 2 Insert the current driver s key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON within 10 seconds of removing the previous key 5 The SECURITY telltale light will turn off once the key has been programmed It may not be apparent that the SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the key is programmed 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes on and stays on you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off Your PASS Key III system however is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS Key III system at this time If you lose or damage a PASS Key III key see your dealer to have a new key made 2 25 New Vehicle Break In Ignition Positions With the key in the ignition you can turn the key to NOTICE four different positions OFF This is the only position from
153. e seconds of silence between each selection for SEEK to work You can skip nine selections up or down on the tape Choose how many selections you want to skip Press the SEEK arrow that many times The number of selections to be skipped will appear on the display A SCAN V Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep The tape will go to the next selection play for a few seconds then go on to the next selection The tape will only scan forward Press this button again to stop scanning The sound will mute while scanning AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when a tape is playing The tape will stop but remain in the player TAPE AUX Auxiliary Press this button to play a cassette tape when listening to the radio The inactive tape will remain safely inside the radio for future listening The tape icon will appear on the display when a cassette tape is loaded If you have the optional CD changer and the CD changer is loaded the TAPE AUX button will activate the changer and an icon will be lit in the display Eject Press this button to stop a tape when it is playing and to remove a tape when it is not playing Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cas
154. e that an oil change is necessary An ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will come on Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you stop for fuel It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Oil Life System in the Index for information on resetting the system Whenever the tires are rotated the Check Tire Pressure System must be reset A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule 7 23 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 7 500 Miles 12 500 km T 2 Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation FP pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km
155. e to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system and it is activated unlock the doors only with the key or remote keyless entry system This will avoid setting off the alarm See Universal Theft Deterrent in the Index for more information To unlock the door from the outside use your door key or remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped Turning the door key toward the rear of the vehicle will unlock the door Turning the door key toward the front of the vehicle will lock it To lock the door from the inside push the manual door lock forward To unlock the door push the manual door lock rearward Central Door Unlocking System If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system all doors will unlock if the key is held in the outside key cylinder unlock position for more than two seconds The doors will also unlock if the key is turned to the unlock position twice in three seconds Power Door Locks With power door locks you can lock or unlock all the doors on your vehicle using the driver s or front passenger s door lock switch Program
156. e will automatically switch to recirculation To find you comfort zone for the automatic settings start with a temperature setting of 75 F 24 C and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Then turn the TEMP knobs up or down to adjust the temperature setting if necessary If you choose the temperature setting of 60 F 15 C the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting and fan speed If you choose the temperature setting of 90 F 33 C the system will remain at the maximum heat setting and fan speed Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster Be sure not to cover the sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates interior temperatures based on sun load To avoid blowing cold air through the system in cold weather the automatic system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on engine coolant temperature Pressing the fan button will override this delay and cancel the automatic mode returning the system to manual mode The EXT exterior temperature sensor is located in the front of the vehicle behind the grill The EXT temperature displayed may not be accurate for a few minutes if you have restarted the engine after it was already warmed Air Conditioning On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot air inside the vehicle escape This reduces the time it takes for
157. e wiper activated headlamps the Twilight Sentinel must be on If the wiper activated headlamps are on and the ignition switch is turned to ON the wiper activated headlamps will continue When you turn the key to OFF the wiper activated headlamps will immediately turn off The wiper activated headlamps will also turn off if you turn off the Twilight Sentinel or the windshield wipers 2 48 Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada A light sensor on top of the instrument panel monitors the exterior light level for the operation of DRL and Twilight Sentinel so be sure it isn t covered The DRL system will make your high beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions are met The ignition is on the exterior lamp control is off and the transaxle is not in PARK P When the DRL are on only your high beam headlamps will be on at reduced intensity The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on Your instrument panel won t be lit either When it s dark enough outside your regular intensity headlamps will come on at full brightness and the DRL lighting will tur
158. eaker 56 57 Mini Relay 58 59 Maxifuse 60 61 62 63 64 6 76 Usage Power Seats Power Windows Usage Cigarette Lighter Rear Defog Usage Not Used Rear Defog Not Used Audio Amplifier Electronic Level Control Compressor Exhaust Maxifuse 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 Usage Cigarette Lighter Not Used Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Fuse Puller Replacement Bulbs Front Outside Lamps Bulb Number Parking Turn Lamps 3157 Headlamp Low Beams eka ee ee eee ee eee 9006 High Beam 5653 sees teieeee cob iwc yes 9005 Rear Outside Lamps Bulb Number 401110 0 ee 3057 Back Up Lamps 000 eee eee 3057 SlOPlAMPS eripere deseesenecdeses Reese es 3057 PUEDE gg ditoey ss Peed Gaon Sas Paley Re Se pote 3157 For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more information Capacities Automatic Transaxle 7 4 quarts 7 0 L Engine Cooling System 10 0 quarts 9 5 L Engine Oil with Filter 4 5 quarts 4 3 L Fuel Tank 18 5 U S gallons 70 0 L All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the appropriate level as recommended in this manual Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 N m Engine Specif
159. earing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following e Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly 3 45 NOTICE Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio be sure you can add what you want If you can it s very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine Delphi Electronics radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly So before adding sound equipment check with your dealer and be sure to check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units 3 46 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape pla
160. eat off The LO setting warms the seatback and cushion until the seat approximates body temperature The HI setting heats the seatback and cushion to a slightly higher temperature The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is turned on The heating elements in the seats automatically turn off when the vehicle s ignition is turned off Reclining Front Seatbacks If your vehicle has a power recliner the vertical control described previously in this section reclines the front seatbacks If your vehicle has the manual recliner lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat and move the seatback to the desired position Release the lever to lock the seatback Pull up on the lever without pushing on the seatback and the seatback will go to an upright position 1 6 But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear
161. ed on while making sharp turns the accuracy may be off When you turn the rear defog off again the accuracy returns to normal Be aware that metal objects are sometimes buried in the ground They can affect accuracy and you may not know they are there As an example many concrete roads have metal reinforcements inside Also if you drive with the trunk open this could affect accuracy and could decalibrate the compass Driver Identifier DIC Display This feature allows two different drivers to store and recall their own preferred display mode The personalization settings displayed on the DIC are determined by the transmitter used to enter the vehicle After the unlock button of a remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped is pressed and the ignition is in ON the DIC will display the identified driver The settings can also be changed by briefly pressing one of the MEMORY buttons located on the driver s door The DIC is used to program information for DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2 The DIC will identify a person as UNKNOWN DRIVER if they are neither DRIVER 1 nor DRIVER 2 DIC Personalization Programming The DIC can be used to program the following personalization features available with your vehicle Automatic Door Locks Window Lockout Security Feedback Delayed Locking Perimeter Lighting Memory Seats Parallel Park Assist Mirror Tilt Mirror Driver ID The DIC is used to program the personal choices of two drivers
162. ed with either the ignition or radio off CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first Compact Disc Messages CHECK CD If this message appears on the radio display and the disc comes out it could be for one of the following reasons The road is too rough The disc should play when the road is smoother The disc is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Trunk Mounted CD Changer Option OF gpro With the optional compact disc changer you can play up to 12 discs continuously Normal size discs may be played using the trays supplied in the magazine The small discs 8 cm can be played only with specially designed trays NOTICE Place large objects in the trunk appropriately so that they will not come into contact with the CD changer Damage could result that wouldn t be covered by your warranty 3 39 You must first load the magazine with discs before you can play a compact disc Each of the 12 trays holds one disc Slide the button on the top of the magazine and pull gently on one of the trays Load the trays from top to bot
163. ee Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark or a little higher When your engine is warm the level should be up to the FULL HOT mark or a little higher Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank but be careful not to spill it Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly With the coolant recovery tank you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator For information on how to add coolant to the radiator see Cooling System in the Index 6 27 Radiator Pressure Cap Power Steering Fluid NOTICE Your radiator cap is a 15 psi 105 kPa pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage ag pel ovEnr mn from overheating Be sure the arrows on the cap P line up with the overflow tube on the radiator fi
164. eld breakage may also occur bag system won t work properly See your dealer from the right front passenger air bag for service Air bags are designed to inflate only once After an air bag inflates you 1l need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag NOTICE system won t be there to help protect you in another so crash A new system will include air bag modules If you damage the Se for the driver aa and possibly other parts The service manual for the right front passenger s air bag or the air your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts bag covering on the driver s and right front 2 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal passengers seathiaek the hag may not wark sensor which helps the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more properly You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel both the air bag severe frontal impact Your vehicle is also equipped module and the instrument panel for the right with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which front passenger s air bag or both the air bag records information about the frontal air bag system module and seatback for the driver s and right The module records information about the readiness front passenger s side impact air bag Do not of the system when the system commands air open or break the air bag coverings bag inflation and driver s safety belt usage
165. elivery by selecting one of the five mode buttons e Vad Defog This setting directs most of the airflow to the floor ducts and the windshield defroster A small amount of airflow is directed to the side window defroster outlets This mode can be useful to remove the moisture from the inside of the windshield when the outside temperature is cold or the humidity is high e td Floor This setting directs most of the airflow to the floor ducts with some airflow directed to the side window defrosters There is also a small amount of airflow directed to the front defroster gt o Vad Bi Level This setting directs airflow through both the instrument panel outlets and the floor ducts There is also a small amount of air directed to the front defroster and the side window defrosters gt o A Vent This setting directs airflow through the instrument panel outlets Kay FRONT Defrost This setting directs most of the airflow to the windshield defroster with some airflow to the side window defrosters and floor ducts To improve windshield clearing performance when you select FRONT defrost your air conditioning compressor will run automatically above approximately 40 F 4 C This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Even though the compressor may be running the A C light will not come on in FRONT defrost unless you select A C lt RECIRC Recirculation Press this button to limit the amount of outside air
166. emperatures above 32 F 0 C use of the coolant heater is not required To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The engine coolant heater cord is located on the passenger s side of the vehicle above the headlamp assembly 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 29 Automatic Transaxle Operation Your automatic transaxle may have a shift lever located on the console between the seats or on the steering column There are several different positions for your shift lever PARK P Th
167. en air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you ve had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system parts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new parts If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash you may need new LATCH system parts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system wasn t being used at the time of the collision If your seat adjuster won t work after a crash the special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat to the adjuster may need to be replaced If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section 1 57 y Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly and what to do if you have a problem 2 2 Windows 2 39 Running Your Engine While You re Parked
168. en your vehicle is stopped 2 If it doesn t start within 10 seconds hold your key in START for about 10 seconds at a time until your engine starts Wait about 15 seconds between each try 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn your 3 If your engine still won t start or starts but then ignition key to START When the engine starts let stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline go of the key The idle speed will go down as your Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the engine gets warm floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing This time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the engine After waiting about 15 seconds repeat the normal starting procedure 2 28 NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you don t your engine might not perform properly Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle At t
169. er When you tow a trailer your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and or extra wiring Check with your dealer All of the electrical circuits required for your trailer lighting system can be accessed at the left rear lamp connector This connector is located under the carpet on the driver s side in the rear corner of your trunk compartment The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Your vehicle has bulb warning lights When you plug a trailer lighting system into your vehicle s lighting system its bulb warning lights may not let you know if one of your lamps goes out So when you have a trailer lighting system plugged in be sure to check your vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they re all working Once you disconnect the trailer lamps the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one of your vehicle lamps is out 4 39 Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don
170. es See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation o S pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 99 000 Miles 165 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL See P SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE 7 20 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 100 000 Miles 166 000 km An Emission Control Service MILEAGE i Replace spark plugs Oooo o An Emission Control Service Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transaxle fluid change both the fluid and filter 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service
171. es from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 6 53 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 6 54 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The w
172. especially for your automatic transaxle Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating in the Index A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Let the warning lights and gages work as they should NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant ot
173. ess one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning To scan preset stations press and hold one of the SCAN arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the preset number appear on the display You will hear a double beep The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station This feature will only scan the six presets that are in the selected band Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning presets The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 30 Tune in the desired station W 4 Press EQ to select the equalization 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble TONE Press and release this button until BASS MID or TREB appears on the display The SELECT LED indi
174. ess this button to play a CD if you have a magazine loaded in the changer when listening to the radio You can also press this button to switch between a cassette tape a CD in the compact disc player and a CD in the trunk mounted CD changer if these sources are loaded Compact Disc Messages If an error appears on the display an error has occurred and the compact disc temporarily cannot play The CD changer will send an error message to the receiver to indicate one of the following e NO CDS An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays e CHECK CD If this message appears it could be one of the following The road is too rough The disc should play when the road is smoother The disc is dirty scratched or wet The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again CD DOOR OPEN The CD changer door is open Completely close the door to restore normal operation If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved
175. essary Requires activation and additional fee Accident Assist An advisor can provide step by step guidance following an accident Remote Door Unlock To contact the center call 1 888 4 ONSTAR You will be required to provide your security information An advisor will send a command to your vehicle to unlock itself The advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle Remote Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is parked to maintain the battery charge 2 63 Vehicle Locator Service To contact the center call 1 888 4 ONSTAR You will be required to provide your security information An advisor will send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn and or flash the lamps Route Support An advisor can provide directions or guidance to most places you want to go In addition they can help you locate gas stations rest areas ATMs hospitals hotels stores eateries and more Ride Assist An advisor can locate transportation in the event that you are unable to drive Concierge Services The concierge advisor can obtain tickets reservations or help with vacation trip planning and other unique items and services OnStar System Limitations Complete limitations can be found on the Subscriber Services Agreement In order to provide you with excellent service calls with the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded 2 64 OnStar Service is Available in the 48 contiguous United States Alaska Hawaii and Canada
176. et With the accessory power outlet you can plug in auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio The accessory power outlet 12 volt is located inside the overhead console if equipped and at the rear of the front console if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with an overhead console access the accessory power outlet by sliding the access door to the side If your vehicle is equipped with a floor console the power outlet is at the rear of the floor console To use the outlet remove the protective cap which covers it When not using it always cover the outlet with the protective cap The accessory power outlet will only operate when the ignition key is in ON and for 10 minutes after turning the ignition OFF If you would like the accessory power outlet to operate regardless of ignition position and for extended periods of time see Engine Compartment Fuse Block in the Index or see your dealer for more information NOTICE When using accessory power outlets NOTICE Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damage it or keep other things from working Maximum load of any electrical equipment as they should This wouldn t be covered by your warranty Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment and never use anything that exceeds the amperage rating should not exceed 15 amps Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment when not in use Leaving e
177. ex Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can See Inflation Tire Pressure in the Index Any time you adjust a tire s pressure or have one or more tires repaired or replaced yov ll need to reset calibrate the check tire pressure system You ll also need to reset the system whenever you rotate the tires buy new tires and install or remove the compact spare Don t reset the check tire pressure system without first correcting the cause of the problem and checking and adjusting the pressure in all four tires If you reset the system when the tire pressures are incorrect the check tire pressure system will not work properly and may not alert you when a tire is low or high To reset calibrate the system with a Driver Information Center DIC 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Using the MODE and SELECT buttons change the DIC to display TIRE PRESSURE 3 Press and hold the RESET button for about five seconds 4 The display should change to read TIRE PRESSURE RESET If TIRE PRESSURE RESET does not appear on the display after about five seconds see your dealer for service 5 When you release the button after seeing the TIRE PRESSURE RESET message the display will change to read TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL To reset calibrate the system with a systems monitor 1 Turn the ignition switch to ON 2 Press and hold the TIRE PRESS RESET button for about five seconds 3 The TIRE PRESS lig
178. ffee black egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water 2 Ifa stain remains follow the cleaner instructions described earlier 3 If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution 1 teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water 4 Let dry Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain 2 First clean with cool water and allow to dry completely 3 Ifa stain remains follow the cleaner instructions described earlier Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do it more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather Soiled or stained leather sho
179. footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 60 000 Miles 100 000 km hange engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL i Emission Control eae A ok If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter a S E For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add the proper supercharger oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service 7 27 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 67 500 Miles 112 500 km SS Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation FP pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine o
180. formation on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 50 00 Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle Owner s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 Current and Past Model Order Forms Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time Visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery 8 12 Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make c
181. forming the following steps 1 Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2 Press PROG TYPE if it is not already on Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the PTY you set will return ye eb 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton RDS Messages ALERT This type of announcement warns of national or local emergencies You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT appears on the display when an alert announcement plays When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing If the compact disc player is playing play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished 3 25 This function will only work during actual emergency broadcasts and will not work during tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations INFO Information If the current station has a message INFO will appear on the display These text messages are from the RDS broadcaster to the listening public and may be general information such as artist and song title call in phone numbers etc Press this button to see the message If the whole message does not appear on the display parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed To scroll through the mes
182. from the neck and head There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts 1 Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seatback 1 35 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic cord must be under the belt Then place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 1 36 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passenger Positions earlier in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the side of the seatback Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Infants and Young Children Every time
183. get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle 6 61 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish 6 62 NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimne
184. gging When the weather is cool or damp operating the system in recirculation without also using the air conditioning may cause fogging of the windshield To clear the fog switch back to outside air select defog or FRONT defrost mode and increase the fan speed To avoid refogging of the windows minimize your use of recirculation under these conditions and turn the air conditioning on to help dehumidify the air Re A C Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning compressor on and off This system will cool and dehumidify the air inside your vehicle The air conditioning compressor will also run when you select the FRONT defrost mode and outside temperatures are approximately 40 F 4 C or higher When in AUTO mode air conditioning will automatically be used as needed to maintain the selected temperature setting 3 6 AUTO Automatic Control Press the AUTO button for automatic control of the air delivery mode fan speed air conditioning and recirculation Whenever AUTO is pressed the display will show the current settings for five seconds before returning the display to exterior temperature and AUTO The fan speed and mode of airflow delivery will vary as the system maintains the selected temperature setting The air conditioning compressor will run at outside temperatures over approximately 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to OUTSIDE AIR If it is hot enough outside the air inlet mod
185. hat of the previous available CD RCL Recall Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing To change what is normally shown on the display track or elapsed time press the knob until you see the display you want and then hold the knob until the display flashes 3 42 A SEEK V Press the down arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played Press the up arrow and it will go to the next track on the disc If the button is pressed more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc A SCAN V Press and hold either arrow for more than two seconds until TRACK SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep You will hear the first few seconds of each track on the current disc The sound will mute while scanning The scan icon will appear on the display and T will blink to indicate track scan mode Press either arrow again to stop scanning To scan all loaded discs press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN appears on the display and you hear a double beep You will hear the first few seconds of track one on each disc The sound will mute while scanning The scan icon will appear on the display and D will blink to indicate disc scan mode Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when playing a CD TAPE AUX CD AUX or CD TAPE Pr
186. he seat cushion To be sure the vent hose A is properly attached the vent hose connectors B must be securely reattached to the vent outlets C on each side of the battery and the vent assembly grommet D must be secured to the floor pan E Vehicle Storage If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index 6 35 Bulb Replacement Headlamps For the type of bulb to use see Replacement Bulbs in the Index For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer Halogen Bulbs Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package 1 Reach behind the headlamp assembly push in and turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove the bulb assembly from the headlamp assembly 6 36 Lift the tabs to remove the bulb from the assembly 3 Replace the
187. he system has been armed While armed the doors will not unlock with the power door lock switch Once armed the alarm will go off if someone tries to enter the vehicle without using the remote keyless entry transmitter or a key breaks a window tries to damage the vehicle or turns the ignition to ON If any of these do occur the horn will sound and the parking lamps will flash for up to two minutes PASS Key III Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS Key III Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key III is a passive theft deterrent system C This means you don t have to do anything different to arm or disarm the system It works when you insert or remove the key from the ignition Your PASS Key III system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada 2 23 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes o
188. he air cleaner filter in place when you re driving Passenger Compartment Air Filter To check or replace the air filter do the following if Equipped 1 With the hood open unlatch and remove the o access panel The passenger compartment air filter removes certain particles from the air including pollen and dust 2 To remove the filter press on the spring tab on particles Reductions in airflow which may occur more the side of the filter housing and pull the filter out often in dusty areas indicate that the filter may need to of the housing be replaced early 3 To install the new filter press on the spring tab and The filter should be replaced as part of the routine insert the filter into the housing The filter should be scheduled maintenance See Maintenance Schedule in fully inserted into the upper and lower grooves and the Index for more information locked into place by the spring tab 4 Reinstall the air filter access panel at the base of The passenger compartment air filter is located on the passenger side of the vehicle at the base of the windshield and can be accessed through a removable panel under the hood of the vehicle the windshield 6 19 Supercharger Oil Unless you are technically qualified and have the proper tools you should let your dealer or a qualified service center perform this maintenance When to Check Check oil level every 30 000 miles 50 000 km or every 36 mont
189. he front seatbacks closest to the door How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle The air bag supplements the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But the frontal air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and many side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward the air bag Side impact air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including frontal or near frontal collisions rollovers and rear impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s frontal air bags and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s side impact air bags 1 27 What will you see after an air bag inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module
190. he remote keyless entry transmitter Avoid setting off the alarm by accident Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident unlock the driver s door with your key You can also turn off the alarm by pressing the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter The alarm won t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way 2 22 Testing the Alarm 1 From inside the vehicle roll down the window 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the SECURITY light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm If the alarm does not sound when it should check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the alarm does not sound or the exterior lamps do not flash see your dealer Content Theft Deterrent Option If your vehicle has this option it has a theft deterrent alarm system A light located in your Twilight Sentinel cluster above the fog lamp button will begin to flash 30 seconds after the vehicle ignition is turned off to let you know t
191. he three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If you have the traction control system remember It helps avoid only the acceleration skid If you do not have traction control or if the system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs If you have Stabilitrak you may see the
192. hecks payable in U S funds
193. heels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use
194. her than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 6 25 What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you don t need to add anything else Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 6 26 NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful Checking Coolant The engine coolant recovery tank is located the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle near the windshield S
195. his for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this Pontiac will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 994954 Polishing Cloth Wax Treated 1050172 Tar and Road Oil Remover 1050173 Chrome Cleaner and Polish 1050174 White Sidewall Tire Cleaner 1050214 Vinyl Cleaner 1050427 Glass Cleaner Chrome and Wire Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and 12377964 16 oz 0 473 L Finish Enhancer Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants Spray on wipe off 12377965 16 oz 0 473 L Switl Remover Polish Reiioves awin marks fine scratehes dnd lhet ligi surface contamination 12377966 16 oz 0 473 L Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish Foaming Tire Cleans shines and protects in one easy step 12378188 15 oz 04431 Shine Low Gloss No wiping necessary Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and lightly waxes 12378401 16 oz 0 473 L Wash Wax Concentrate Biodegradable and phosphate free
196. hs whichever occurs first What Kind of Oil to Use Use only the recommended supercharger oil See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 20 How to Check and Add Oil Park the vehicle on a level surface Check oil only when the engine is cold Allow the engine to cool two to three hours after running If you remove the supercharger oil fill plug while the engine is hot pressure may cause hot oil to blow out of the oil fill hole You may be burned Do not remove the plug until the engine cools 1 Clean the area around the oil fill plug before removing it 2 Remove the oil fill plug 3 The oil level is correct when it just reaches the bottom of the threads of the inspection hole 4 Replace the oil plug with the O ring in place Tighten to 88 Ib in 10 N m Automatic Transaxle Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions Jn heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km See
197. ht on the systems monitor should begin to flash If the TIRE PRESS light does not begin to flash after about five seconds see your dealer for service 4 Release the TIRE PRESS RESET button and the system should reset The TIRE PRESS light will go out The system completes the calibration process during driving Calibration time can take 45 to 90 minutes depending on your driving habits After the system has been calibrated the system will alert the driver that a tire is low up to a maximum speed of 65 mph 105 km h 6 49 Tire Inspection and Rotation Don t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles puna 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire Loading wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or Information label Reset the Check Tire Pressure wheels See When It s Time for New Tires and System See Check Tire Pressure System in the Index Wheel Replacement later in this section for Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened more information See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index f
198. ications VIN Engine Code 3800 V6 Engine L36 0 2 eee K 3800 V6 Supercharged Engine L67 1 YPC fiend e er ee d nS n DEON TANA V6 Displacement 2 00 000 3 8L Firing Order 1 6 5 4 3 2 6 77 Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity If you do your own service work you ll need the proper service manual See Doing Your Own Service Work in the Index for additional information It is recommended that service work on your air conditioning system be performed by a qualified technician Air Conditioning Refrigerant R 134a 2 2 Ibs 1 0 kg Use Refrigerant Oil R 134a Systems 6 78 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Engine Air Cleaner Filter A 1096C Passenger Compartment Air Filter occueds ees ens GM Part No 25654414 Engine Oil Filter 0 0 PF 47 Fuel Filter cc cc pied ee oiea cheeks GF 627 Transaxle Filter GM Part No 24206433 Spark Plugs 0 0 0 00000 41 921 Gap 0 060 inch 1 52 mm Windshield Wiper Blades MVC a k E Stee sat Shepherd s Hook Length 0005 22 inches 56 cm ACDelco part number y Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance 7 2 Introduction 7 31 Part B Owner Checks and Services
199. icle To help reduce the chance of injury the child also has to be secured within the restraint The vehicle s belt system secures the add on child restraint in the vehicle and the add on child restraint s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoulder straps two hip straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructio
200. ied by looking for the starburst symbol This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol If you change your own oil be sure you use oil that has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container If you have your oil changed for you be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle as shown in the following chart 6 14 RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE HOT WEATHER F COLD WEATHER i BY FoR Q FOR THIS GASOLINEE A ENGINES fg SYMBOL _ SAE 10W 30 PREFERRED above 0 F 18 C SAE SW 30 DO NOT USE SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED SAE 10W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can use SAE 5W 30 if it s going to be colder than 60 F 16 C before your next oil change When it s very cold you should use SAE 5W 30 These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 NOTICE Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in eng
201. il and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY ae p e SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter a e E Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation PF pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 7 28 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE f If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter a ee Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add the proper supercharger oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote
202. ill come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds then flash for about 55 seconds If the driver s belt is already buckled the light will come on briefly but the chime will not sound 2 77 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows AIR BAG The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready AIR BAG If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away 2 78 If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the air bag system may not be working properly The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you
203. ilter Replace engine air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add the proper supercharger oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 7 12 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 33 000 Miles 55 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE 36 000 Miles 60 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation o S E pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 39 000 Miles 65 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL bates i SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE 7 13 Short Trip City Scheduled
204. in a comfortable driving position adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle Grip the mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to side The day night adjustment allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from any headlamps behind you Push the tab away from you for daytime use pull it toward you for night use Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror If Equipped Your vehicle may have an automatic electrochromic day night rearview mirror Your vehicle s mirror may also contain OnStar controls 4 On Off This is the on off button for mirrors equipped with OnStar controls When this feature is turned on the mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you A photocell on the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside Another photocell built into the mirror face senses when headlamps are behind you At night when the glare is too high the mirror will gradually darken to reduce glare this change may take a few seconds The mirror will return to its clear daytime state when the glare is reduced Mirror Operation To turn on the automatic dimming feature press AUTO or the on off button for mirrors equipped with OnStar controls To turn off automatic dimming press OFF or the on off button for mirrors equipped with OnStar controls The indicator light will be illuminated when this feature is active 2 55 Power Remote Control Review Mirrors The contro
205. in the Index Also see Engine Oil When to Change and Maintenance Schedule in the Index Tire Pressure Status Press the SELECT button until TIRE PRESSURE appears in the display TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL is displayed when the Check Tire Pressure System believes your vehicle s tire pressures are normal If a potential problem is detected the display will show CHECK TIRE PRESSURE and the tire pressure status will show TIRE PRESSURE LOW If you see the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message you should stop as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage If a tire is flat see If a Tire Goes Flat in the Index Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can See Inflation Tire Pressure and Check Tire Pressure System in the Index DIC Warnings and Messages Other messages or warnings may appear in the DIC display For Canadian drivers in addition to the DIC message your DIC will display EXP with a number after it which reflects the following messages EXP Export ID Warning Message B E SERVICE VEHICLE SOON OD eu eheeieeebi la bbisacs CHECK GAGES VOLT Te sesb es w weedeat CHECK GAGES LOW FUEL WO vineisane bass ENGINE HOT A C DISABLED QO E Genet Whee Ewha ote TURN SIGNAL ON DA ciate Aan Bala ede e eked viatenecdcens TRUNK AJAR DD saibns ave ba wave oka ks WASHER FLUID LOW QT ied Ve bee d oes BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE BS pmedaades STARTING DISABLED THEFT BA edhe beeen
206. in this section gt 1 Forward Press this pushbutton to advance quickly to another part of the tape Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances You may select stations during forward operation by using TUNE While in forward mode the display will show FREQ and FWD and two right arrows If the radio is playing a RDS station the display will only show FREQ VA 2 Side Press this pushbutton to play the other side of the tape 4 lt q Reverse Press this pushbutton to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses You may select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE 6 DO Dolby Press this pushbutton to reduce background noise DOLBY NR ON will appear on the display Press it again to turn Dolby NR off 3 18 Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation EQ Equalizer Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a cassette The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a cassette tape See EQ listed previously for more information A SEEK V Press the up or down arrow to search for the next or previous selection on the tape Your tape must have at least thre
207. in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote 37 500 Miles 62 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE SERVIC Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation a S E pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 7 25 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km eee In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly i i reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km 7 26 Long Trip Highway Scheduled Maintenance 52 500 Miles 87 500 km Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See
208. ine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil Additives Don t add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection When to Change Engine Oil Vehicles Without the GM Oil Life System If any one of these is true for you use the short trip city maintenance schedule Most trips are less than 5 miles 8 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle The vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner If any one of these is true for your vehicle then you need to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever occurs first 6 15 If none of them is true use the long trip highway maintenance schedule Change the oil and filter every 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months whiche
209. ineering that went into it Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP you can play your audio system even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP in the Index 3 11 Setting the Clock Press and hold HR or MIN for two seconds Then press and hold HR until the correct hour appears AM or PM will appear on the display Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears The clock may be set with the ignition on or off To set the clock to the time of an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System RDS information press and hold HR and MIN at the same time until UPDATED and the clock symbol appear on the display If the time is not available from the station NO UPDATE will appear on the display instead 3 12 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio Data System RDS If Equipped Playing the Radio PWR Power Push this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn this knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume SCV Speed Compensated Volume With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select MIN MED or MAX Each higher choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessa
210. infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by the appropriate restraint Young children should not use the vehicle s safety belts unless there is no other choice 1 37 For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 lb 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it CAUTION Continued 1 38 Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer outstanding protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Q A What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used
211. ing Safety Defects to the United TTY Users States Government 8 5 Customer Assistance Offices 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to the 8 6 GM Mobility Program for Persons Canadian Government with Disabilities 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 8 6 Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program Pontiac Cares WPoNnTAc With PONTIAC CARES you are never more than a phone call away from having your concern taken care of The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elements are designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes you as a valuable customer appreciates your purchase decision and is dedicated to taking care of the most important person YOU PONTIAC CARES is A valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac a feature that offers a multitude of benefits that can give you safety security comfort and convenience What Makes Up Pontiac Cares A 3 year 36 000 mile 60 000 km Bumper to Bumper Warranty Customer Assistance Roadside Assistance Courtesy Transportation All of these elements combine to make your driving experience an enjoyable one and are discussed in greater detail in your owner s manual Pontiac is focusing on the changing needs of our customers and is committed to giving you an exceptional level of customer care throughout your ownership experience Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasm in our product and our services and make you the most satisfied customer in the world Customer
212. ions you want to skip Press the SEEK arrow that many times The number of selections to be skipped will appear on the display A SCAN V Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep The tape will go to the next selection play for a few seconds then go on to the next selection Press this button again to stop scanning The sound will mute and SCAN will appear on the display while scanning The tape will scan in forward only AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when a tape is playing The tape will stop but remain in the player The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening 3 36 CD TAPE Press this button to switch between playing a cassette tape and a compact disc if both are loaded when listening to the radio The display will show tape and CD icons Eject Press this button located next to the cassette tape slot to eject a tape Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first Cassette Tape Messages If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape it could be for one of the following reasons TIGHT TAPE This message is displayed when the tape is tight and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockw
213. iper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a full strength glass cleaning liquid The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can
214. ips all across North America They ll be ready and willing to help if you need it Here are some things you can check before a trip Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps 4 23 Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool in
215. is opened the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamps are turned on To restore power back to the cigarette lighters the ignition must be turned back to ON Battery Load Management The battery load management feature is designed to monitor the vehicle s electrical load and determine when the battery is in a heavy discharge condition During times of high electrical loading the engine may idle at higher revolutions per minute rpm than normal to make sure the battery charges High electrical loads may occur when several of the following are on headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger fan on high speed heated seats and engine cooling fans If your vehicle s battery remains in a heavy discharge condition for a long period of time the fan rear defogger heated seats and heated mirrors will be disabled and the DIC will display BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE This can happen either under long periods of idling or low speed driving with high electrical loading or in the event of a charging system fault Monitor the battery voltage when in the BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE mode Ifthe voltmeter remains in the shaded area below 11 volts when driving then have the charging system serviced immediately If the voltage increases above 12 volts then the battery needs to be recharged Try driving on the highway with as few electrical accessories on as possible Mirrors Inside Day Night Manual Rearview Mirror When you are sitting
216. is button until BAL appears on the display The SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press and release this button until FADE appears on the display The SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for two seconds will return all tone settings to flat regardless of tone selected FLAT will appear on the display 3 31 Using RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS is a system that sends data along with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned to You can use RDS to display program information and to control your radio With RDS the radio can do the following e Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to seek to stations with traffic announcements receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies and receive and display messages from radio stations RDS is always on RDS features are only available for use on FM stations which broadcast RDS information The RDS features of your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information from these stations These feature
217. is position locks your front wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily 2 30 It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition key is in ON If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PARK P and also release the shift lever button on floor shift console models as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish press the shift lever button before moving the shift lever on floor shift console models See Shifting Out of PARK P in the Index REVERSE R Use this gear to back up NOTICE Shif
218. ise with a pencil Turn the tape over and repeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly BROKEN TAPE This message is displayed when the tape is broken Try a new tape WRAPPED TAPE This message is displayed when the tape is wrapped around the tape head Attempt to get the cassette out Try a new tape CLEAN PLAYER If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after disabling the tight loose tape sensing feature on your tape player To disable the feature use the following steps Turn the radio off Press and hold the CD TAPE button The radio will display READY and flash the cassette icon Insert the adapter into the cassette slot It will power up the radio and begin playing This override routine will remain active until the eject button is pressed Playing a Compact Disc With the ignitio
219. it for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill gasoline Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle in the Index When you put the fuel cap back on turn it to the right clockwise until you hear a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index If your vehicle has the optional Driver Information Center DIC the CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed if the fuel cap is not properly reinstalled NOTICE If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index Fuel Door Lock Option On models having the optional theft deterrent system the fuel door is locked and unlocked together with the driver s power door lock Therefore to unlock the fuel filler door you may use the inside power door lock button or the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped To unlock the fuel door unlock the driver s door If your vehicle has a fuel door lock the fuel door can
220. ive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured You may also damage your vehicle the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle 4 34 Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transaxle wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads generating extra heat What s more
221. l not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood do the following 1 Pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle It is located next to the parking brake pedal near the floor 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and push up on the secondary hood release 3 Lift the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then pull the hood down and close it firmly 6 10 When you open the hood on the 3800 L36 engine 3800 Supercharged L67 engine similar here s what you will see A Engine Compartment Fuse Block D Radiator Pressure Cap H Automatic Transaxle B Windshield Washer E Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Fluid Dipstick Fluid Reservoir F Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Master Cylinder C Engine Coolant Recovery Tank G Engine Oil Fill Cap J Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Oil If the OIL LEVEL LOW message appears on the DIC or the CHECK OIL LEVEL light appears on the instrument cluster it means you need to check your engine oil level right away 7 CHECK OIL LEVEL For more information see Check Oil Level Light or DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index You should check your engine oil level regularly this is an added reminder 6 12 Checking Engine Oil It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle
222. laying speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances You may select stations during forward operation by using TUNE While in forward mode the display will show FREQ and FWD and two right arrows If the radio is playing a RDS station the display will only show FREQ VA 2 Side Press this pushbutton to play the other side of the tape 4 lt q Reverse Press this pushbutton to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses You may select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE 6 DO Dolby Press this pushbutton to reduce background noise DOLBY NR ON will appear on the display Press it again to turn Dolby NR off Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation 3 35 EQ Equalizer Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a cassette The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a cassette tape See EQ listed previously for more information A SEEK V Press the up or down arrow to search for the next or previous selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for seek to work You can skip nine selections up or down on the tape Choose how many select
223. ld clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem 3 20 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio Data System RDS If Equipped aritytt AARNA E im y Playing the Radio PWR Power Push this knob to turn the system on and off VOL Volume Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume SCV Speed Compensated Volume With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select MIN MED or MAX Each higher choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV select OFF RCL Recall Push this knob to display the station being played and to display the clock Pressing this knob with the ignition off will display the clock Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection T
224. lectrical equipment on for extended periods can drain the battery When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible E the equipment with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on accessory power outlets NOTICE Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty 2 61 OnStar System If Equipped OnStar is a vehicle communications system that offers a variety of services and provides a one touch hands free communication link between you and the OnStar Center To receive OnStar services a service subscription agreement is required and an additional fee may be required Services are available 24 hours a day 7 days a week For more information call 1 888 ONSTAR 7 1 888 667 8277 OnStar Services Button Press this button once to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with these services If you are not quickly connected the system will automatically reset and redial This ensures connection to the center there is no additional action required Press the Communication button to cancel the automatic redial 2 62 Emergency Button
225. lership as soon as possible for assistance Cellular Antenna The cellular antenna on the outside of your vehicle is critical to effective communications using the OnStar system Optimum cellular reception can be obtained when the mast is straight up and down OnStar Services The following services are available within OnStar service plans Your vehicle comes with a specific one year service plan that allows use of some or all of the following services Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment If an air bag deploys a priority emergency signal is automatically sent to the center An advisor will locate your vehicle s position try to contact you and assist you in the situation If the center is unable to contact you an emergency service provider will be contacted Stolen Vehicle Tracking Call the center at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 to report your vehicle stolen The system can then attempt to locate and track your vehicle and the advisor will assist the proper authorities Roadside Assistance with Location For vehicle breakdowns press the OnStar Services button An advisor will contact the appropriate help Remote Diagnostics If an instrument panel light comes on press the OnStar Services button An advisor can perform a check of the engine on board computer and recommend what action needs to be taken OnStar MED NET Med Net can store your personal medical history and provide it to emergency personnel if nec
226. lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps The transaxle fluid dipstick top is a round red loop and is located next to the brake master cylinder behind the engine block See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location 1 Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the cross hatched area If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way 6 23 How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross hatched area on the dipstick 1 Pull out the dipstick 2 Using a long neck funnel add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill 6 24 NOTICE We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON III because fluid with that label is made
227. light is part of the systems monitor It will come on and a warning chime will sound when the driver s door or one of the passenger s doors is not completely closed DOOR AJAR On vehicles with a DIC the door that is ajar will be shown as an icon next to the vehicle outline and a message will appear on the display See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information 2 91 Trunk Ajar Light If Equipped Fuel Gage This light is part of the systems monitor It will r iT r iT come on and a warning H H TRUNK AJAR chime will sound when Wi 1 2 My Yi w a 4 Yi the trunk is not N9 Ne completely closed On vehicles with a DIC the TRUNK AJAR light is replaced by the TRUNK AJAR message See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information United States Canada When the ignition is on your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have in your tank 2 92 When the gage reads in the colored band a warning chime will sound and the CHECK GAGES warning light will come on You still have a little fuel left but you need to get more fuel right away On vehicles with a DIC the CHECK GAGES LOW FUEL message will be displayed when the fuel gage reads in the yellow band See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information Here are some things that owners ask about None of these show a problem with your fuel gage At the service station the gas pump
228. listen to seek to stations with traffic announcements receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies and receive and display messages from radio stations RDS is always on RDS features are only available for use on FM stations which broadcast RDS information The RDS features of your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information from these stations These features will only work when the RDS information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station 3 24 When you are tuned to an RDS station the station name will appear on the display instead of the frequency Most RDS stations provide their station name the time of day and a Program Type PTY for their current programming Some stations also provide the name of the current program Finding a PTY Station PROG TYPE Program Type This button is used to turn on and off Program Type PTY select P TYPE will appear on the display and the SELECT LED indicator will light The last selected PTY will appear on the display for five seconds Turn the SELECT knob to select the PTY you want to listen to Press the SEEK up arrow and the radio will search for an RDS station that is broadcasting the PTY that you have selected The last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan modes When the SELECT LED indicator is on and
229. ll off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years about 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it s against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if the driver plans to drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of some
230. ller neck APPROVED PLIGG ot p a N 5 The power steering fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location 6 28 When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for reservoir location How to Check Power Steering Fluid Turn the key off let the engine compartment cool down wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufact
231. ls for the power remote review mirrors are located on the driver s door armrest Press the left or right side of the L R selector switch located beneath the control pad to choose the left or right mirror 2 56 To adjust the mirror press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to move the mirror in the direction you want it to go When finished adjusting the mirrors leave the L R selector switch in the center position to prevent unwanted mirror movement in case the control pad is accidentally bumped while driving Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a little of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with the memory seat and mirrors feature these mirror positions along with the driver s seat position can be stored in memory See Memory Seat and Mirrors in the Index Parallel Park Assist Mirror If Equipped If you have the memory seat and mirrors feature the passenger s outside rearview mirror also includes a tilt down feature that operates when the shift lever is in REVERSE R When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R the passenger s mirror will return to its original position after a five second delay This delay prevents movement of the mirror if multiple gear transitions REVERSE R to DRIVE D to REVERSE R occur during a parallel parking maneuver This feature can be programmed on or off through the DIC personalization programming menu See
232. lso lock when the lock button is pressed The trunk will unlock when the trunk symbol is pressed when the ignition is in OFF The trunk symbol will also work when the ignition is on but only while in PARK P or NEUTRAL N Instant Alarm When the button with the horn symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed the horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds This can be turned off by pressing the instant alarm button again or by turning the ignition to ON If your vehicle has the Universal Theft Deterrent feature you may also turn off the alarm by unlocking the vehicle with a key See Universal Theft Deterrent in the Index Personalization Features The following features if available on your vehicle can be programmed to each driver s preference for each of the remote keyless entry transmitters Programmable Automatic Door Locks Security Feedback Delayed Locking Perimeter Lighting Seat and Mirror Recall If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center DIC you must program these features through the DIC See Driver Information Center Personalization Programming in the Index For more detailed information and programming instructions refer to the Index for each individual feature listed above Security Feedback This feature provides feedback to the driver when the vehicle receives a command from the remote keyless entry tra
233. ly the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working 4 38 Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trail
234. mable Automatic Door Locks Close the doors and turn on the ignition Every time you move the shift lever out of PARK P all of the doors will lock And every time you stop and move the shift lever into PARK P the doors will unlock If someone needs to get out while you re not in PARK P have that person use the manual door lock or the power door lock switch When the door is closed again it will not lock automatically Just use the manual door lock or the power door lock switch to lock the door again Overriding Lock Delay If you need to lock your doors before shifting out of PARK P just use the manual door lock or the power door lock switch to lock the doors Personalization Programming You can program the automatic door lock feature to change to the following modes Mode 0 No automatic door lock or unlock Mode 1 All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK P No automatic door unlock Mode 2 All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK P Only the driver s door automatically unlocks when shifted into PARK P Mode 3 All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK P All doors automatically unlock when shifted into PARK P Mode 4 All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK P Only the driver s door automatically unlocks when the key is turned to OFF DIC equipped vehicles only Mode 5 All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK P All doors
235. manually Comfort Stop Press and release the switch rearward to the second position to express open the glass panel to the comfort stop position The comfort stop position is designed to help reduce noise and make passengers more comfortable Express Open When the glass panel is express opening pressing the switch in any direction will stop it in a partially opened position The glass panel may be fully opened by pressing the switch rearward again If you press and hold the switch in the express open position for more than one and a half seconds the express open operation will be overridden and the sunroof will operate manually Close To close the glass panel press and hold the switch forward As the glass panel reaches the closed position it will open slightly toward the vent position and then drop down to the closed position to provide a better seal The sunshade must be closed manually Vent Once the sunroof is closed it can be opened to the vent position by pushing the switch upward To close the glass panel pull the switch downward The sunshade must be opened and closed manually for vent operation 2 65 HomeLink Transmitter If Equipped 2 66 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera
236. mbols instead of text Symbols used on your vehicle are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator reference the following topics in the Index Engine Compartment Overview Instrument Panel Comfort Controls Audio Systems Also see Warning Lights and Gages in the Index These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle LATCH BOTH LAP AND Rosson SHOULDER BELTS TO M gt or ENGINE TOURY PROTECT OCCUPANT 4 oe COOLANT DONOTTWISTSAFETY A oy eae BELT WHEN ATTACHING PROTECT e TURN EYES BY FASTEN SIGNALS BATTERY SHIELDING SEAT AIR BAG T aN CHARGING SYSTEM PELIS PARKING CAUSTIC LANDS BATTERY MOVE SEAT DO NOT INSTALL J FULLY lt A REAR FACING ACID COULD CAUSE REARWARD Van CHILD RESTRAINT HAZARD BURNS SECURE IN THIS SEATING CHILD SEAT POSITION WARNING FLASHER COOLANT SWNERIS AVOID PULL BELT MANUAL SPARKS OR OUT FLAMES COMPLETELY v DO NOT INSTALL A i ea DAYTIME THEN SECURE RUNNING ENGINE OIL SERVICE me CHILD SEAT IN THIS SEATING LAMPS ee tee SPARK OR POSITION FLAME COULD Power MLT DOOR LOCK ANTI LOCK SERVICE En EXPLODE TOE a RLOCK DKES ABS MANUAL BATTERY y Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here yov ll find information about the sea
237. mple below When you end this high speed driving return to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire Loading Information label Example You ll find maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire s sidewall in small letters near the rim flange It will read something like this Maximum load 690 kg 1521 Ibs 300 kPa 44 psi Max Press For this example you would set the inflation pressure for high speed driving at 35 psi 244 kPa NOTICE Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards 6 47 When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Don t forget your compact spare tire It should be at 60 psi 420 kPa How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture Check Tire Pressure System The check tire pressure system can ale
238. n and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see the part of this manual called Children Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 1 14 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt positioned so you would be able to unbu
239. n glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and aren t even aware of it 4 17 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because tire to road traction isn t d dr ds Wh ff mhill My Hf UR m And if your tie don have much wead left you ll gei r LEP pay even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be y H i i j Wh i if y y I cautious if rain starts to fall while ok driving The i pals j j J surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals X p pavement markings the edge of the road and even Piman V pe people walking pe p ee i It s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they sho
240. n off The parking lamps that normally come on with your headlamps will also come on When it s bright enough outside the regular intensity headlamps and parking lamps will turn back off and the reduced brightness DRL lighting will turn back on To idle your vehicle during the day with the DRL off shift the transaxle into PARK P The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK P At night you can turn off all exterior lamps when you are in PARK P by turning the Twilight Sentinel knob all the way to OFF If the knob was already in OFF it must be cycled to ON and back to OFF Turn the knob clockwise to turn the exterior lighting back on The lamps will come back on automatically when you put the transaxle in gear As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Fog Lamps The fog lamps button is located below the twilight knob to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel An indicator light in the button will glow when the fog lamps are on Your parking lamps will also come on automatically while the fog lamps are active If your fog lamps are on when you use your high beams or flash to pass feature the fog lamps will be disabled while the feature is being used 2 49 Twilight Sentinel The Twilight Sentinel will keep your headlamps on for up to three minutes to light your way when you leave your vehicle To operate the Twilight Sentinel turn the DEL
241. n on insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing If you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off first press the eject symbol or push the RCL knob If you insert a CD with the radio off and the ignition on it will start to play When the disc is inserted the CD symbol will be displayed If you select an EQ setting for your CD it will be activated each time you play a CD As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section pp 1 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release it to play the passage The display will show elapsed time RDM 3 Random Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM and the track number will appear on the display 3 37 4 lt q Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release it to play the passage The display will show elapsed time EQ Equalizer Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a compact disc The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc See EQ listed previously for more information A SEEK V Press the down arrow while playing a CD t
242. nd metric units TRIP RESET This button allows you to reset your trip odometer To reset the trip odometer press the TRIP RESET button The trip odometer will now accumulate miles kilometers until the next reset MODE This button allows you to toggle through the DIC modes Vehicle Data Personalization Programming Compass Calibration SELECT This button allows you to select a DIC mode RESET This button when used along with other buttons will allow you to reset system functions Vehicle Data Average Fuel Economy Press the SELECT button until the display shows AVG FUEL ECONOMY Average fuel economy is viewed as a long term approximation of your overall driving conditions To learn the average fuel economy from a new starting point press the RESET button for five seconds while the average fuel economy is displayed on the DIC Instantaneous Fuel Economy Press the SELECT button until the display shows INST FUEL ECONOMY Instantaneous fuel economy varies with your driving conditions such as acceleration braking and the grade of the road being traveled The RESET button does not function in this mode 2 97 Fuel Range Press the SELECT button until the display shows FUEL RANGE The fuel range will calculate the remaining distance you can drive without refueling This calculation is based on the average fuel economy for the last 25 miles 40 25 km driven and the fuel remaining in the fuel tank If the fuel range drops
243. nd plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You ll save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light 4 21 Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane 4 22 At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freewa
244. next track Press the down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played If less than eight seconds have played press the down arrow to go to the previous track A VOL Volume Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume PLAY Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when listening to the radio MUTE Press this button to silence the system Press it again or any other radio button to turn on the sound Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference is described as an increased level of static while listening to the radio If you notice static while listening to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Tips About Your Audio System H
245. ng RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS With RDS the radio can do the following Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to seek to stations with traffic announcements receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies and receive and display messages from radio stations RDS is always on RDS features are only available for use on FM stations which broadcast RDS information The RDS features of your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information from these stations These features will only work when the RDS information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station When you are tuned to an RDS station the station name will appear on the display instead of the frequency Most RDS stations provide their station name the time of day and a Program Type PTY for their current programming 3 15 Finding a PTY Station PROG Program TYPE This button is used to turn on and off Program Type PTY select The P TYPE icon will appear on the display and the SELECT LED indicator next to the SELECT knob will light The last selected PTY will appear on the display for five seconds Turn the SELECT knob to select the PTY you want to listen to Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to find radio stations of the PTY you want to li
246. ng off see Twilight Sentinel in the Index Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Brightness Control When it is dark outside you can brighten or dim your instrument panel cluster lights using the DIM knob located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the instrument panel cluster lights and displays Turn the knob clockwise all the way to turn on the interior courtesy lamps Turn the knob counterclockwise to dim the instrument panel cluster lights and displays and to turn off the courtesy lamps Courtesy Lamps If it is dark enough outside when any door is opened several lamps will come on They make it easier for you to enter and leave the vehicle Turn the dimmer knob all the way clockwise to turn the interior courtesy lamps on Illuminated Entry If it is dark enough outside and you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped the interior courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for approximately 25 seconds The lamps will turn off immediately by pressing the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter by turning the ignition key to ON or by activating the power door locks If a door is left ajar your interior lamps will turn off after 10 minutes to save your battery Delayed Entry Lighting When you open the door to enter your vehicle the interior lamps will come on if it is dark eno
247. ns are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer 1 43 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat General Motors therefore recommends that child restraints be secured in the rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat Here s why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat 1 44 A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat but before you do always m
248. ns until the indicator light on HomeLink begins to flash rapidly this may take up to 90 seconds If you have trouble programming HomeLink make sure that you have followed the directions exactly as described and that the battery in the hand held transmitter is not weak If you still cannot program it move the hand held transmitter to the left or right or forward or backward or flip it upside down HomeLink may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated attempts refer to Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes later in this section or contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Be sure to keep the original hand held transmitter in case you need to erase and reprogram HomeLink 2 67 Training a Garage Opener with a Rolling Code Feature If Equipped If you have not previously programmed the hand held transmitter to HomeLink see Programming the HomeLink Transmitter listed previously If you have completed this programming already you now need to train the garage door opener motor head unit to recognize HomeLink 1 Find the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener motor head unit The exact location and color will vary by garage door opener brand If you have difficulty finding the Learn or Smart button refer to your garage do
249. nsmitter Feedback is only provided if all doors are closed the ignition is off and the Retained Accessory Power is inactive The following modes may be selected Mode 1 No feedback when locking or unlocking vehicle Mode 2 Parking lamps and the daytime running lamps will flash twice when unlocking the vehicle and will flash once when locking the vehicle Mode 3 Horn will chirp when all doors are unlocked second unlock button press and when locking the vehicle Mode 4 Parking lamps and the daytime running lamps will flash twice each time the button with the unlock symbol is pressed the horn will chirp when all doors are unlocked Parking lamps and the exterior lamps will flash once and the horn will chirp when locking the vehicle 2 15 To change to another mode do the following 1 Keep all doors closed the vehicle in PARK P and the ignition on throughout this procedure 2 Press and hold the driver s power door lock switch in LOCK through Step 4 3 Press the button with the trunk symbol on the transmitter The transmitter will remain in its current mode and the horn will chirp as feedback 4 Press the button with the trunk symbol again Each time the transmitter s trunk button is pressed the mode will advance by one going from Mode 2 to 3 to 4 etc and the horn will chirp as feedback 5 Release the power door lock switch The security feedback will remain in the most recent mode selected
250. nt station is tuned to If the INFO button is pressed when INFO is not displayed and an old message has not been stored by the radio the radio will display NO INFO 3 34 TRAF Traffic Press this button to receive traffic announcements The traffic announcement brackets will appear on the display TRAF will appear on the display if the current station broadcasts traffic announcements If the current station does not broadcast traffic announcements the radio will seek to a station that does When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements it will stop TRAF will appear on the display If no station is found NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback of a CD cassette or FM radio by enabling the traffic interrupt feature Press the TRAF button once to turn on the traffic feature if supported by the current RDS station If the station does not support the traffic interrupt feature the radio will search for an RDS station that does support the feature When the traffic interrupt feature is on TRAF will appear on the display When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio station or a related network station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or a compact disc is playing If the cassette tape or compact disc player was being used the cassette tape or compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it st
251. o go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played Press the up arrow to go to the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc A SCAN V Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep The disc will go to the next track play for a few seconds then go on to the next track Press this button again to stop scanning The sound will mute while scanning SCAN and the track number will appear on the display 3 38 RCL Recall Press this button to see how long the current track has been playing To change what is normally shown on the display track or elapsed time press the button until you see the display you want then hold the button until the display flashes While elapsed time is showing CD TIME will appear on the display AM FM Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing CD TAPE Press this button to switch between playing a cassette tape and a compact disc if both are loaded when listening to the radio The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening The display will show tape and CD icons If you have the optional CD changer and it is loaded the CD TAPE button will activate the changer and an icon will be lit in the display Eject Press this button to eject a CD Eject may be activat
252. o that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything between an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering Don t let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact air bag When should an air bag inflate The driver s and right front passenger s frontal air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes But they are designed to inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal air bags which adjust the amount of restraint according to crash severity For moderate frontal impacts these air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment 1 26 For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level for the reduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph 18 to 26 km h and the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph 29 to 38 5 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher The driver s and right front passenger
253. o turn off the flashers push the button again When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals won t work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be covered by your warranty The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer Do not charge test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won t work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system NOTICE If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged 2 Get the vehicles close
254. oading Your Vehicle a i GM TIRE LOADING INFORMATION OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP FRT CTR RR TOTAL K L MAX LOADING GVWR SAME AS 200 D TIRE PRESSURE OT ADD 28KPA 4PS S MANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION J Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry The Tire Loading Information label found on the rear edge of the driver s door tells you the proper size speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle It also gives you important information about the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options 4 32 ra b MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP DATE GVWR GAWR FRT THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO AL ge L e OTOR VEHICLE SAFETY BUMPER TI NTIONSSTANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DA GM OF M WN ABOVE 200 ASS CAR Ne J The other label is the Certification label found on the rear edge of the driver s door It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR f
255. oard snap and secure the lamp assembly with the two bolts Rear Turn Signals Stoplamps Taillamps and Back Up Lamps 3 Pull the carpeting away from the rear corner of the trunk Back Up Lamp Turn Signal Taillamp Tail Brake Lamp Open the trunk Turn the screws located inside of the trunk counterclockwise and remove them Remove the plastic trim piece from the trunk 6 44 Remove the three nuts holding the lamp in place and remove the lamp assembly While pressing the release turn the bulb socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the lamp assembly 6 Pull the bulb straight out from the socket 7 Replace the bulb and reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the lamp assembly Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking See Wiper Blade Check in the Index for more information For the proper windshield wiper blade replacement length and type see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts in the Index To replace the wiper blade assembly 1 Lift the wiper up from the windshield and set into the vertically locked position 2 Press the tab that holds the wiper blade to the arm 3 Slide the blade down and off the arm 4 Slide in the new blade and snap into place 6 45 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have q
256. ock control system You have to fully apply your regular brake before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in ON See Automatic Transaxle in the Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you want if you have the console shift lever press the button first If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to OFF Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 Shift to NEUTRAL N Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want ge ee NS 5 Take your vehicle to an authorized service center as soon as you can 2 37 Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into A hicle Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust A E parts under your vehicle and ignite
257. on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light earlier in this section The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 81 Traction Control System Warning Light Option This warning light should come on briefly when the engine is started TRAC OFF If the warning light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If it stays on or comes on when you re driving there may be a problem with your traction control system and your vehicle may need service When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly 2 82 The traction control system warning light may come on for the following reasons If you turn the system off by pressing the TRACTION CONTROL button located on the center console the warning light will come on and stay on To turn the system back on press the button again The warning light should go off See Traction Control System in the Index for more information If there s a brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control the t
258. one who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 1b 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men 4 4 Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in an increasing number of U S states and throughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all comme
259. oor locks will remain in the most recent mode selected This procedure changes the mode for only the transmitter used to change this setting The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information Center DIC you must program this feature through the DIC See Driver Information Center Personalization Programming in the Index 2 9 Delayed Locking This feature lets the driver delay the actual locking of the vehicle When the driver s power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry lock button is pressed with the key removed from the ignition and the driver s door open a chime will sound three times to signal that the delayed locking system is active When all doors have been closed the doors will lock automatically after five seconds If any door is opened before this the five second timer will reset itself once all the doors have been closed again Pressing a power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry lock button again will override this feature Personalization Programming The delayed locking feature can be turned on or off If your vehicle is not equipped with remote keyless entry the delayed locking feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure 1 Keep all doors closed the vehicle in PARK P and the ignition on throughout this procedure 2 Press and hold the driver s power door lock switch in LOCK through
260. oot off the accelerator pedal you get up to the speed you want and then release it To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch to R A briefly and then release it Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed 1 6 km h faster and then you apply the brake This of course shuts off the cruise control But you don t need to reset it Resuming a Set Speed The accelerate feature will only work after you have set the cruise control speed by pressing the SET button 2 45 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control Press and hold the SET button until you get to the speed you want and then release it To slow down in very small amounts press and release the SET button briefly Each time you do this you ll go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier 2 46 Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep y
261. oper position Then proceed with the lumbar adjustment To reshape the lower seatback press the lumbar control forward to increase support and rearward to decrease support Press the control up or down to raise or lower the support mechanism Keep in mind that as your seating position changes as it may during long trips so should the position of your lumbar support Adjust the seat as needed If you have the independent front cushion moved down as far as it will go you may feel the lumbar support higher in your back Readjust the position of the cushion until you are comfortable You may also want to adjust the seatback for maximum comfort 1 4 Memory Seat and Mirrors Option If your vehicle has this feature the controls are on the driver s door panel and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver s seating outside mirror positions and comfort controls See Comfort Controls in the Index for more information Adjust the driver s seat including the lumbar adjustments and both outside mirrors to the position you would like for driving Then press and hold memory button 1 for more than three seconds A double beep will sound when the memory is set To set the seat and mirror positions for a second driver follow the previous steps but press button 2 instead You can also store an exit position for each driver The exit position is programmed by moving the seat to the desired exit po
262. opped Radio Messages CALIBRATE Your audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If CALIBRATE appears on the display it means that your radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to the dealership for service Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape can be inserted and will begin playing If you hear nothing but a garbled sound the tape may not be in squarely Press the eject button to remove the tape and start over While the tape is playing use the VOL BAL FADE TONE EQ and SEEK controls just as you do for the radio The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or chrome tape is inserted If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off first press the eject button or push the RCL knob If an error appears on the display see Cassette Tape Messages later in this section gt 1 Forward Press this pushbutton to advance quickly to another part of the tape Press this pushbutton again to return to p
263. or either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Don t carry more than 176 lbs 80 kg in your trunk Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Things you put inside your vehicle can strike GVWR or either the maximum front or rear and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can a crash break and it can change the way your vehicle e Put things in the trunk of your vehicle In a handles These could cause you to lose control trunk put them as far forward as you can and crash Also overloading can shorten the life Try to spread the weight evenly of your vehicle Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in NOTICE your vehicle When you carry something inside the Your warranty does not cover parts or vehicle secure it whenever you can components that fail because of overloading If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they ll keep going 4 33 Electronic Level Control This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the load changes It is automatic you do not need to adjust anything Towing a Trailer If you don t use the correct equipment and dr
264. or opener owner s manual or contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist in programming the transmitter 2 68 2 Press the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener motor head unit An indicator light will begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the training mode Following this step you have 30 seconds to start Step 3 3 Return to HomeLink in your vehicle and firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button three times The rolling code garage door opener should now recognize HomeLink You may either use HomeLink or the hand held transmitter to open the garage door If after following these instructions you still have problems training the garage door opener contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Canadian Programming Canadian Owners During programming the hand held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after two seconds In this case you should press and hold the HomeLink button see Steps 2 and 3 under Programming the HomeLink Transmitter while you press and repress cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink is trained Operating the HomeLink Transmitter Press and hold the appropriate button on HomeLink for at least a half of a second The indicator light will come
265. or scheduled rotation intervals Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here 6 50 When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 6 51 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Tire Loading Information label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performan
266. ormation on this feature see Delayed Locking in the Index Perimeter Lighting Personalization When the button with the unlock symbol on the transmitter is pressed the Daytime Running Lamps high beams at reduced intensity parking lamps and back up lamps will turn on if it is dark enough according to the Twilight Sentinel You can control activation of this feature by choosing OFF or ON when the PERIMETER LIGHTS choice is displayed on the DIC Make your choice by pressing the RESET button and record your choice by pressing the SELECT button You will then be prompted to choose a TIMEOUT period The PERIMETER LIGHTS TIMEOUT feature can be changed to desired setting by using the RESET button to toggle from 5 to 30 seconds Each toggle will increase the time by five seconds Once the desired timeout is displayed press select to record your choice and move on to the next personalization feature For more information on this feature see Perimeter Lighting in the Index 2 107 Memory Seat Recall If Equipped This feature recalls the position of your seat When this feature is active the memory seat and mirror positions will be recalled for the identified driver when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to enter the vehicle You can program this feature to be active by choosing ON when the SEAT RECALL choice appears or inactive by choosing OFF when the SEAT RECALL choice appears on the DIC Make your choices
267. orming the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to select the desired equalization 3 Press and hold EQ for two seconds SELECT EQ will appear on the display The EQ icon will flash 4 Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the desired EQ number Each time you press EQ or turn the SELECT knob another EQ setting will appear on the display 5 Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT knob to store the equalization preset You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will appear on the display 6 Repeat the steps for each EQ setting EQ 5 has been programmed for use with talk radio but it can be preset to a different tone Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL Balance Press and release this button until BAL appears on the display The SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press and release this button until FADE appears on the display The SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for two seconds will return all tone settings to flat regardless of tone selected FLAT will appear on the display Usi
268. ose Lubricant Hinge Glove Superlube GM Part Box Door No 12346241 or equivalent Console Door Hinge Rear Compartment Lid Hinges Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Conditioning Part No 12345579 or equivalent Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services or Periodic Maintenance can be added on the following record pages Also you should retain all maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED y Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact Pontiac if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects 8 2 Pontiac Cares 8 8 Canadian Roadside Assistance 8 2 What Makes Up Pontiac Cares 8 8 Courtesy Transportation 8 3 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 10 Warranty Information 8 5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 8 10 Report
269. ot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed CAUTION Continued 5 15 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops Don t press down while turning the pressure cap If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left Then keep turning the pressure cap but now push down as you turn it Remove the pressure cap Remove the 3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield to access the bleed valve There is one bleed valve It is located on the thermostat housing 4 After the engine cools open the coolant air bleed valve A Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube and cap before removing Twist the oil fill tube with cap attached counterclockwise and remove it B If you have the supercharged engine remove the nut in the center of the cover shield C Lift the engine cover shield at the front slide the catch tab out of the engine bracket and remove the cover shield D Put the oil fill tube with cap attached in the valve cover oil fill hole until you re ready to replace the cover shield 5 17 7 Replace the 3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield
270. ould increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it 4 3 A i as D SGIAN i J The belt is twisted across the body 1 19 To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle 1 20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front
271. our speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal move the cruise switch to OFF or pull the multifunction lever toward the driver Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased Exterior Lamps The lever on the left side of the steering column operates the exterior lamps D Turn the outside part of the lever with the symbol on it to operate the lamps The exterior lamp switch has three positions OFF Turning the switch to this position turns off all lamps and lights except the Daytime Running Lamps DRL 00 Parking Lamps Turning the switch to this position turns on the parking lamps together with the following Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights D Headlamps Turning the switch to this position turns on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights 2 47 Wiper Activated Headlamps This feature turns on the low beam headlamps instrument panel cluster backlighting and taillamps when the Twilight Sentinel is in day mode and after the windshield wipers have been in use for approximately six seconds To operate th
272. our vehicle may fail a smog check test If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Additives Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly You should not have to add anything to your fuel Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
273. ove the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap or top tether It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision For it to work a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle Some top strap equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored Others require the top strap always to be anchored Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If yours requires that the top strap be anchored don t use the restraint unless it is anchored properly If the child restraint does not have a top strap one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored In the United States some child restraints also have a top strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points Be su
274. own as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That s why safety belts make such good sense 1 12 Q If my vehicle has air bags why should I have to A wear safety belts Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If Pm a good driver and I never drive far from A home why should I wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone 1 13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller childre
275. p other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index Headlamp Wiring The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off or in some cases to remain off If this happens have your headlamp system checked right away Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem be sure to have it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the rear fuse block protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away 6 67 Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating The MaxiFuses are located in two fuse blocks
276. pped with the Driver Information Center DIC you must program this feature through the DIC See Driver Information Center Personalization Programming in the Index Front Reading Lamps The front reading lamps located on the headliner will come on as courtesy lamps when you open any of the doors while it is dark outside They will also come on as part of the interior lighting features listed previously To turn on a reading lamp when the doors are closed press either button Press it again to turn the lamp off To avoid draining your vehicle s battery be sure to turn off the reading lamps when leaving your vehicle See Inadvertent Power Battery Saver later in this section for more information 2 53 Rear Reading Lamps The rear reading lamps located over each rear door will come on as courtesy lamps when you open any of the doors while it is dark outside They will also come on as part of the interior lighting features listed previously To turn on a reading lamp when the doors are closed press either button Press it again to turn the lamp off 2 54 Inadvertent Power Battery Saver This feature is designed to protect your vehicle s battery against drainage from the interior lamps trunk lamp glove box lamp or cigarette lighters When the ignition is turned off the power to these features will automatically turn off after 10 minutes Power will be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door
277. pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle If there seems to be no leak with the engine on check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they aren t your vehicle needs service NOTICE Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn t covered by your warranty NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 5 13 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank If you haven t found a problem yet but the coolant level isn t at the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL engine coolant at the coolant
278. r modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment PASS Key III uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle 2 24 When the PASS Key III system senses that someone is using the wrong key it shuts down the vehicle s starter and fuel systems The starter will not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the engine Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not start and the SECURITY light comes on the key may have a damaged transponder Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer who can service the PASS Key III to have a new key made It is possible for the PASS Key III decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle This procedure is for learning additional keys only Canadian Owners If you lose or damage your keys only a GM dealer can service PASS Key III to hav
279. r vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going how much fuel you re using and many other things you ll need to drive safely and economically Your vehicle is equipped with one of these instrument panel clusters which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the following pages iow npn N 200 KA too ey 280 P 7 Wr GB88 PEELED SECURITY E7 CHECK SERVICE SERVICE E OIL LEVEL ENGINE SOON VEHICLE SOON ers WASHER T Fio a UE x i AAAA a Mi li V 40 Yi D RPM X 1000 V Ky TIRE PRESS SYSTEMS MONITOR 0 oles 4 120 amp CA fous 18 TRUNK AJAR Standard Cluster United States version shown Canada similar 2 72 w agag 2888688 SECURITY SERVICE SERVICE ENGINE SOON VEHICLE SOON NOU LU m AANA y ys 40 y A RPM X 1000 N ky O OLPSI 120 8 pus 18 DRIVER INFORMATION 898 8988889899 69 B88 BBE Bee 8s be Cluster with Driver Information Center DIC United States version shown Canada similar 2 73 SN LET TRAC x ie Yy OFF A w ABAE 224888 RN 7 Be Wy LOW XN Joor 280 P E B cr Mig gt 1 SS 4 La S SERVICE S71 mesoo cx RU Ly ASS l Wy 10 BOOST 10 S 2 SECURITY 5 N 4 D ae 1 ANT R D RPM X 1000 LOCK nn RN YW RS 40 0 OLLPS 120 Cluster with Driver Information Center DIC and Boost Gage United States version shown Canada similar 2 74 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed
280. raction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on If your brakes begin to overheat the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on until your brakes cool down If the traction control system is affected by an engine related problem the system will turn off and the warning light will come on If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on your vehicle needs service Low Traction Active LOW TRAC Light In these situations when the LOW TRAC light is on and the system is engaged you should continue to Your LOW TRAC Low steer in the direction you want to go The system is Traction Active light may designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult LOW come on for one of the driving situations by making the most of whatever TRAC following reasons road conditions will permit The optional Traction Control System is active and is limiting wheel spin You may feel the system working but this is normal Slippery road conditions An advanced computer controlled system called may exist so adjust your driving accordingly Stabilitrak if equipped has come on to help your If the LOW TRAC light comes on slippery road vehicle continue to go in the direction in which conditions may exist so you should consider slowing you re steering This stability enhancement system down and adjusting your driving a
281. rcial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up Ill be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse espe
282. re driving there s a problem with your traction control system TRAC OFF See Traction Control System Warning Light in the Index When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the system on But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index To turn the system off press the TRACTION CONTROL button located on the instrument panel under the comfort controls 4 10 The traction control system warning light in the instrument cluster will come on and stay on If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button the warning light will come on but the system won t turn off right away It will wait until there s no longer a current need to limit wheel spin You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again The traction control system warning light should go off The switch indicator light should go back on Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort
283. re controlled by the radio pushbuttons except for ejecting the magazine Playing a Compact Disc If an error appears on the display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section The following pushbuttons are used for the trunk mounted CD changer gt 1 Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly advance within a track As the CD advances elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage WA 2 Next Press this pushbutton to select the next disc in the magazine Each time you press this pushbutton the disc number on the radio display will go to that of the next available CD 3 41 RDM 3 Random Press this pushbutton to enter the multi disc random play mode RANDOM ALL will appear on the display The tracks on all of the discs will be played in random order Press and hold this button to enter the single disc random play mode RANDOM ONE will appear on the display and a chime will sound The tracks on the current disc will play in random order Press this button again to turn off the random feature and return to normal operation 4 lt q Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly reverse within a track As the CD reverses elapsed time will be displayed with a flashing arrow to help you find the correct passage 5 Previous Press this pushbutton to select the previous disc in the magazine Each time you press this pushbutton the disc number on the radio display will go to t
284. re safer if they are restrained in the rear seat In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts 1 54 Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt A but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window move the child toward the center of the vehicle If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position move the child toward the safety belt buckle In either case be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt if your vehicle has one 1 55 1 56 Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the chil
285. re to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed 1 45 Once you have the top strap anchored you ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer s instructions say Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for the rear seating positions Yov ll find them behind the rear seat on the filler panel In order to get to a bracket you Il have to open the trim cover 1 46 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System Your vehicle has the LATCH system You ll find anchors A in all three rear seat positions a 7 To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child restraint system each seating position with the LATCH system will have a label sewn to the seatback at each anchor position In order to use the system you need either a forward facing child restraint that has attaching points B at its base and a top tether anchor C or a rear facing child restraint that has attaching points B as shown here With this system use the LATCH system instead of the vehicle s safety belts to secure a child restraint 1 47 If a LATCH type child restraint isn t attached to its anchorage points the restraint won t be able to protect a child sitting there In a crash the child could be seriously injured or
286. recovery tank See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 14 NOTICE In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the FULL COLD mark start your vehicle If the overheat warning continues there s one more thing you can try You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it Steam and scalding liquids from a h
287. red or killed by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in the rear seat You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put the restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 49 Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or safety belt quickly if you ever had to neck put it behind the child restraint 1 50 4 To tighten the belt pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten th
288. remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off 5 26 Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 8 Place the compact spare tire on the wheel mounting surface Then reinstall the wheel nuts with rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Make sure each wheel bolt is centered in each wheel hole while tightening the nuts Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub 10 Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 5 27 5 28 11 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a CrisScross sequence Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb ft 140 N m NOTICE Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torq
289. rface The vehicle should not have any snow ice or mud attached to it The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 Ibs 75 kg on the driver s seat Tires should be properly inflated Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low beam lamps The high beam lamps will be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps are aimed properly The headlamp aiming devices are under the hood near the headlamps If you believe your headlamps need horizontal left right adjustment follow the horizontal aiming procedure If you believe your headlamps need only vertical up down adjustment follow only the vertical aiming procedure Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx socket or T15 Torx screwdriver Headlamp Horizontal Aiming Turn the horizontal aiming screw A until the indicator B is lined up with zero Once the horizontal aim is adjusted then adjust the vertical aim 6 39 Headlamp Vertical Aiming 3 At the wall or other flat surface measure from the ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2 and draw or tape a horizontal line the width NOTICE of the vehicle Horizontal aiming must be performed before making any adjustments to the vertical aim Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an incorrect headlamp aim 1 Find the aim do
290. rheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving 2 34 Steering Column Shift Lever 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P like this Move the lever up as far as it will go 3 Turn the ignition key to OFF 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand your vehicle is in PARK P Pull the lever toward you 2 35 Console Shift Lever Option 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P like this Hold in the button on the lever Push the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle 3 Turn the ignition key to OFF 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand your vehicle is in PARK P 2 36 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You
291. rid and affect your radio s ability to pick up stations clearly The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty If when you turn on your rear window defogger you hear static on your radio station it could mean that a defogger grid line has been damaged If this is true the grid line must be repaired If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone to your vehicle and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM FM antennas or place the cellular telephone antenna over the grid lines 3 48 Chime Level Adjustment The volume level of the vehicle s chimes can be controlled by the radio To change the volume level press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power off The chime volume level will change from the normal level to loud and LOUD will be displayed on the radio To change back to the default or normal setting press and hold pushbutton 6 again The chime level will change from the loud level to normal and NORMAL will be displayed y Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here yov ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving 4 2 Defensive Driving 4 18 4 3 Drunken Driving 4 21 4 6 Control of a Vehicle 4 22 4 6 Braking 4 23 4 9 Traction Control System If Equipped 4 24 4 10 Steering 4 24 4 13 Off Road Recovery 4
292. rship name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Pontiac please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP 8 4 The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business
293. rt you to a large change in the pressure of one tire The system won t alert you before you drive that a tire is low or flat You must begin driving before the system will work properly 6 48 The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC or the system monitor TIRE PRESS light will come on if pressure difference low pressure is detected in one tire The check tire pressure system may not alert you if more than one tire is low the vehicle is moving faster than 65 mph 105 km h the system is not yet calibrated the compact spare tire is installed e e e the tire treadwear is uneven e tire chains are being used or e the vehicle is being driven on a rough or frozen road If the anti lock brake system warning light comes on the check tire pressure system may not be working properly See your dealer for service Also see Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index The check tire pressure system detects differences in tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes in tire pressure The system can alert you about a low tire but it doesn t replace normal tire maintenance See Tires in the Index When the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message appears on the Driver Information Center or the systems monitor TIRE PRESS light comes on you should stop as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage If a tire is flat see If a Tire Goes Flat in the Ind
294. ry to overcome noise at any speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV select OFF RCL Recall Push this knob to display the station being played or to display the clock Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Turn this knob to choose radio stations A SEEK V Press the up or down arrow to go to the next or previous station and stay there The radio will seek to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while seeking A SCAN V Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows for two seconds until the scan icon appears on the display and you hear a beep The radio will go toa station play for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning The radio will scan to stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning To scan preset stations press and hold one of the SCAN arrows for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the preset number appears on the display You will hear a double beep The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons play for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press one of the SCAN arrows again to stop scanning presets The radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only The sound will mute while scanning 3 13 Setting Preset Stations The
295. s The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it Defogging and Defrosting On cool humid days use defog to keep the windshield and side windows clear Use FRONT defrost to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extremely humid or cold conditions If you have the standard system select defog and adjust the temperature and fan speed to your comfort level Turn the A C on to help dehumidify the air Use FRONT defrost with the temperature toward the red area and the fan speed toward high If you have the electronic system and select FRONT defrost or defog from AUTO the system will control the fan speed After the windshield is clear adjust the temperature to your normal setting and select the AUTO button and return to AUTO mode and fan control For maximum FRONT defrost performance under extreme icing or frosting conditions increase the temperature setting to 90 F 33 C and increase the fan speed to high Rear Window Defogger The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass Press the button to start warming your window A light will glow in the button while the defogger is working If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this button will activate them After 10 minutes the system will turn off by itself or press the button during the heating cycle to turn it off If you need additional warming time push the button again The system will then operate for five minute
296. s before turning off by itself If your speed is maintained over 30 mph 48 km h the rear defog will not turn off automatically to help keep the rear glass clear NOTICE Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp This may damage the defogger grid The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window Ventilation System For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use the vent setting on the standard system to direct outside air through your vehicle Air will flow through the instrument panel outlets Your vehicle s flow through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle while it s moving While the vehicle is not moving you can get outside air to flow through by selecting any air delivery mode and any fan speed Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle Move the knob in the center of each outlet up down or side to side to direct the air from the outlet Use the thumbwheel in the center to shut the outlet off For the most efficient airflow and temperature control keep the shut off door in the fully opened position In vehicles equipped with rear seat outlets you can adjust the airflow toward either seating area
297. s around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Tire Loading Information label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to it Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle See Carbon Monoxide in the Index Dirt and water can too Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
298. s only Check the supercharger oil level and add the proper supercharger oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 7 16 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 63 000 Miles 105 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY ue gt SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote Et 66 000 Miles 110 000 km a Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation PF pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 69 000 Miles 115 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY bans i SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE 72 000 Miles 120 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in
299. s well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead In remote areas watch for animals If you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clea
300. s will only work when the RDS information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station 3 32 When you are tuned to an RDS station the station name will appear on the display instead of the frequency Most RDS stations provide their station name the time of day and a Program Type PTY for their current programming Some stations also provide the name of the current program Finding a PTY Station PROG TYPE Program Type This button is used to turn on and off Program Type PTY select P TYPE will appear on the display and the SELECT LED indicator will light The last selected PTY will appear on the display for five seconds Turn the SELECT knob to select the PTY you want to listen to Press the SEEK up arrow and the radio will search for an RDS station that is broadcasting the PTY that you have selected The last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan modes When the SELECT LED indicator is on and a PTY is not displayed the first time SEEK is pressed the last selected PTY will be displayed Press the SEEK up arrow again to seek If a station with the selected PTY is not found NOT FOUND will appear on the display To use the PTY interrupt feature press and hold PROG TYPE until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt An asterisk will appear next to the PTY name for example CLASSIC
301. sage at your own speed press the INFO button again for less than one second A new group of words will appear on the display Once the complete message has been displayed INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received The old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button until a new message is received or a different station is tuned to If the INFO button is pressed when INFO is not displayed and an old message has not been stored by the radio the radio will display NO INFO 3 26 TRAF Traffic Press this button to receive traffic announcements The traffic announcement brackets will appear on the display TRAF will appear on the display if the current station broadcasts traffic announcements If the current station does not broadcast traffic announcements the radio will seek to a station that does When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements it will stop TRAF will appear on the display If no station is found NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback of a CD or FM radio by enabling the traffic interrupt feature Press the TRAF button once to turn on the traffic feature if supported by the current RDS station If the station does not support the traffic interrupt feature the radio will search for an RDS station that does support the feature When the traffic interrupt feature is on TRAF will appear on the display
302. schedule Whenever the tires are rotated the Check Tire Pressure System must be reset 7 9 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY ie gt SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote a 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Ss Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation PF pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 9 000 Miles 15 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY Saws SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE 12 000 Miles 20 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation fF pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 7 10 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE f Inspect engin
303. section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grad
304. sette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition to ON or ACC 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for three seconds The tape symbol on the display will flash for five seconds and READY will appear on the display indicating the feature is active 4 Insert the adapter into the cassette slot It will power up the radio and begin playing This override routine will remain active until the eject button is pressed 3 19 Cassette Tape Messages If an error appears while trying to play a cassette tape it could be for one of the following reasons TIGHT TAPE This message is displayed when the tape is tight and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape over and repeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly BROKEN TAPE If this message is displayed the tape is broken Try a new tape WRAPPED TAPE When this message is displayed the tape is wrapped around the tape head Attempt to get the cassette out Try a new tape CLEAN PLAYER If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you shou
305. shion or is twisted won t provide the protection needed in a crash If the safety belt hasn t been routed through the seat cushion at all it won t be there to work for the next passenger The person sitting in that position could be badly injured After reinstalling the seat cushion always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and are not twisted To reinstall the rear seat cushion do the following 1 Buckle the center passenger position safety belt then route the safety belts through the proper slots in the seat cushion Don t let the safety belts get twisted 6 72 2 Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the Rear Underseat Fuse Block seatback so the rear locating guides hook into the wire loops on the back frame The rear fuse block is located below the rear seat on the driver s side The rear seat cushion must be removed to access the fuse block See Removing the Rear Seat Cushion in the Index 3 With the seat cushion lowered push rearward and then press down on the seat cushion until the spring locks on both ends engage 4 Check to make sure the safety belts are properly routed and that no portion of any safety belt is trapped under the seat Also make sure the seat cushion is secured 6 73 66 38 GAGs 56 5 amp ad 33 67 e 2 eD
306. shuts off before the gage reads full It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank Boost Gage If Equipped Vehicles equipped with the supercharged engine have this boost gage that indicates vacuum during light to moderate throttle and boost under heavier throttle S y G 0 f A 10 Boost 10 The gage displays the air pressure level going into the engine s combustion chamber The gage is automatically centered at zero every time the ignition key is turned to ON Actual vacuum or boost is displayed from this zero point Changes in ambient pressure such as driving in mountains and changing weather will slightly change the zero reading 2 93 Systems Monitor if Equipped The following warning lights are displayed in the systems monitor ENN If you have the systems CHECK OIL LEVEL This message could mean 7 CHECK 8 Montor tl IVES yOu your oil level is low If it comes on for more than OIL LEVEL important safety and five seconds see Check Oil Level Warning Light on maintenance facts about your vehicle DONNA DOOR AJAR WASHER FLUID This message means your TRE PRESS washer fluid tank is less than about 30 percent full If SYSTEMS pee i MONITOR this light comes on see Low Washer Fluid
307. sion control system on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so Stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling Your Tank in the Index The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel
308. sition and then holding the EXIT button for more than three seconds The exit position set will be for the most recently selected driving position 1 or 2 Mirror and lumbar positions will not be stored or recalled for the exit position To recall your memory positions your vehicle must be in PARK P Push and release the memory button 1 or 2 corresponding to the desired driving position The seat and mirrors will move to the position previously stored for the identified driver You will hear one beep To recall the exit position your vehicle must be in PARK P Push and release the EXIT button and the seat will move to the exit position previously stored for the currently identified driver You will hear one beep If an exit position has not been stored for the currently identified driver the seat will move all the way back To stop recall movement of the seat at any time press the power seat control located on the outboard side of the driver s front seat If you would like your stored driving or exit position to be recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the transmitter see DIC Personalization Programming in the Index Heated Front Seats Option If your vehicle has this option the heated front seat controls are located on the instrument panel under the comfort controls Push the ON part of the button once for a HI setting or twice for a LO setting Push the OFF part of the button to turn the heated s
309. six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press EQ to select the desired equalization 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 14 Setting the Tone Bass Treble TONE Press and release this button until BASS MID or TREB appears on the display The SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the tone control can be adjusted When adjusting BASS MID or TREB turn the SELECT knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Pressing and holding the TONE button for two seconds will return all tone settings to flat regardless of tone selected FLAT will appear on the display EQ Equalizer This feature allows you to choose preset bass mid and treble equalization settings designed for different program types Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting Each time you press EQ another setting will appear on the display You can preset up to six equalization settings by perf
310. someone Store all these in the proper place The compact spare tire is for temporary use only Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon as you can See Compact Spare Tire later in this section See the storing instructions label to return your compact spare into your trunk properly 5 30 A B C D E F Wrench Jack Jack Container Retainer Compact Spare Tire Cover Retainer Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your trip and have your full size tire repaired or replaced where you want You must calibrate the Check Tire Pressure System after installing or removing the compact spare See Check Tire Pressure System in the Index Of course it s best to replace your spare with a full size tire as soon as you can Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again NOTICE When the compact spare is installed don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on
311. st to reveal the storage space Pull down the interior door to access the trunk Convenience Net Option Your vehicle may have a convenience net You ll see it just inside the back wall of the trunk Put small loads like grocery bags behind the net It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops For heavier loads store them in the trunk as far forward as you can You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you re not using it 2 58 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Push down on the cover to reveal the front ashtray To clean the ashtray lift it out by pulling on the finger holes on each side On models without a console an ashtray is located underneath the instrument panel To clean the ashtray lift it out by pulling up on the tabs on either side It snaps back into place To open a rear ashtray lift the cover NOTICE Don t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays If you do cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire causing damage The cigarette lighter is located next to the storage tray To use a lighter just push the center in all the way and let it go When it is ready the center will pop back out by itself Pull out the entire unit to use it NOTICE Don t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating If you do it won t be able to back away from the heating element when it s ready
312. sten to The last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan modes If a station with the selected PTY is not found NOT FOUND will appear on the display If both PROG TYPE and TRAF are on the radio will search for stations with traffic announcements and the selected PTY To use the PROG TYPE interrupt feature press and hold this button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt An asterisk will appear next to the PTY name for example CLASSICAL When you are listening to a cassette the last selected RDS FM station will interrupt play if that selected PTY format is broadcast 3 16 AM FM Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations Setting PTY Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite Program Types PTYs These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets You can set up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2 2 Press PROG TYPE to activate program type mode 3 Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
313. t Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the cleaner fluid could leak inside the unit If you can t see the HUD image when the ignition is on check to see if The HUD unit is covered the HUD INTENSITY knob is adjusted correctly the HUD image is adjusted to the proper height or a fuse in the fuse panel may have blown See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the HUD image is not clear it could be too bright Move the HUD INTENSITY knob counterclockwise You may need to clean the windshield and HUD lens Your windshield is part of the HUD system If you ever have to have a new windshield be sure to get one designed for HUD If you don t the HUD image may look blurred and out of focus 2 111 y Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle Comfort Controls Air Conditioning Heating Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger Ventilation System Comfort Controls Personalization If Equipped Audio Systems Setting the Clock AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio Data System RDS If Equipped AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio Data System RDS If Equipped 3 29 S OS oe S A Ee a a AARAA ARARAROO
314. t don t start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle needs service 7 33 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position The key should turn to OFF only when the shift lever is in PARK P The key should come out only in OFF Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move 7 34 Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody
315. t on the lens of the low beam lamps 4 Turn on the low beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being aimed This should allow only the beam of light from the headlamp being aimed to be seen on the flat surface 2 Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot on each lamp if left low beam subtract two inches Record this distance 6 40 5 Turn the vertical aiming NOTICE screw C until the headlamp beam is aimed Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam to the horizontal tape cut off when aiming Covering a headlamp may line The top edge of the cause excessive heat build up which may cause cut off should be damage to the headlamp She ne arnt tape line 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp 6 41 1 Remove the two bolts 2 Use a large screwdriver by the outside mount to separate the lamp assembly from the outboard snap mounting pin Slide the headlamp assembly outward and lift it out 3 Disconnect the wiring harness from the headlamp assembly 4 Tip the headlamp assembly and while pressing the release turn the bulb and socket counterclockwise to remove them 5 Replace the bulb and reinstall the socket Then reconnect the wiring harness to the lamp assembly 6 Slide the lamp assembly back into place by lining up the track on the bottom of the assembly with the guide on the vehicle Then connect the outb
316. t pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 29 Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly
317. t the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year 7 36 Throttle System Inspection Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Engine Oil Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol of the proper viscosity To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil in the Index 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water
318. tem calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Anytime your oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to an ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message being turned on reset the system Always reset the engine oil life to 100 after every oil change It will not reset itself To reset the Oil Life System do the following 1 Display OIL LIFE on the DIC 2 Press and hold the RESET button for more than five seconds The oil life will change to 100 What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help Engine
319. tenance Services explains what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you want to get the service information see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that your dealer s service department or another qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle Keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
320. terior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 4 24 Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain If you drive regularly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transaxle These parts can work hard on mountain roads Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you don t shift down your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Al
321. tery If it won t start after a few tries it probably needs service NOTICE Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly To prevent electrical shorting take care that the cables don t touch each other or any other metal The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Jumper Cable Removal A Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive or Remote Negative Terminals C Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle 5 Return the positive remote terminal cover to its original position Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance in the Index If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing in the Index Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage or a DIC warning messag
322. tes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism Diversity Antenna System Your AM FM antennas are located in the windshield and rear window Be sure that the inside surfaces of the windshield and rear window are not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surfaces are damaged they could interfere with radio reception Do not apply an aftermarket glass tinting The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception 3 47 NOTICE Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp This may damage the rear defogger g
323. the condition of the charging system Readings between the shaded warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the shaded warning zones indicate a possible problem in the electrical system On vehicles with the systems monitor the CHECK GAGES light will also come on and a warning chime will sound if there is a problem in the electrical system Have your vehicle serviced immediately 2 79 On vehicles with a DIC a CHECK CHARGE SYSTEM message will be displayed and a warning chime will sound if there is a problem in the electrical system Have your vehicle serviced immediately See DIC Warnings and Messages in the Index for more information Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there is a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away Canada BRAKE United States 2 80 This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON If it doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on ha
324. the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information 6 55 Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 6 56 Tire Chains If your vehicle has P235 55R17 size tires don t use tire chains there s not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s contacting your vehicle and don t spin your wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the front tires NOTI
325. the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer Don t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers or no more than 55 mph 90 km h to save wear on your vehicle s parts Three important considerations have to do with weight the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue and the total weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It should never weigh more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg But even that can be too heavy It depends on how you plan to use your rig
326. the Index for proper rotation fF l pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 7 17 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL SERVICED BY aie gt SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote MILEAGE Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Pf Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote If Equipped Replace passenger compartment air filter 78 000 Miles 130 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation fF pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote 81 000 Miles 135 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first ACTUAL MILEAGE An Emission Control Service See footnote es SERVICED BY 7 18 Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance 84 000 Miles 140 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and ad
327. the floor or upward Move the knob in the center of each outlet in any direction to direct airflow Increase or decrease the amount of airflow from the upper outlets by adjusting the lever between the two rear vents up or down to the floor ducts Ventilation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work better reducing the chance of fogging your windows In cool damp weather minimize your use of recirculation to reduce the chance of fogging your windows When you enter a vehicle with the standard system in cold weather select floor mode to supply air through the floor ducts Then turn the fan on high for a few moments before driving away This will blow moist air from the intake outlets toward the floor not the windshield It reduces the chance of fogging your windows If you have the electronic system the AUTO setting will do this for you Manual operation of the electronic system in the floor mode will also supply air through the floor ducts Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle 3 49 _ _ ________ ss s ssssssssSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS Comfort Controls Personalization If Equipped This feature enables up to two drivers to store and recall comfort control settings for the temperature fan speed and the direction of the airflow The memory
328. the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements it will stop If no station is found NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio station or a related network station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape is playing If the cassette tape player was being used the tape will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player The longer side with the tape visible should face out If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape can be inserted and will begin playing If you hear nothing but a garbled sound the tape may not be in squarely Press the eject button to remove the tape and start over While the tape is playing use the BAL FADE TONE EQ and SEEK controls just as you do for the radio The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape 3 17 Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or chrome tape is inserted If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off first press the eject button or the RCL knob If an error appears on the display see Cassette Tape Messages later
329. the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone isn t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot 4 14 Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your right outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when t
330. ths whichever occurs first 3800 Code 1 V6 engine only Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transaxle Service severe conditions only Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Continued 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance Short Trip City Intervals Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Automatic Transaxle Service normal conditions Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages 7 6 Long Trip Highway Definition Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip City Scheduled Maintenance are true Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads Use the Short Trip City schedule for these conditions Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down slower Scheduled Maintenance Long Trip Highway Intervals Long Trip Highway Intervals Every 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Engine Oil and Filter Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Change or every 12 months whichever occurs first Drive Belt Inspection Tire Rotation i Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Every 3
331. ting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transaxle see Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index NEUTRAL N In this position your engine doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only Also use NEUTRAL N when your vehicle is being towed Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty 2 31 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving however it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVE
332. tion This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Programming the HomeLink Transmitter Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door you are programming It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Decide which one of the three channels one of the three HomeLink buttons you want to program 2 Press and hold the desired button on HomeLink through Step 3 3 When the HomeLink indicator light begins to blink slowly this may take up to 30 seconds hold the hand held transmitter about to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm from HomeLink and then press and hold the transmit button on the hand held transmitter Continue to hold both butto
333. tion 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 22 Setting the Tone Bass Treble TONE Press and release this button until BASS MID or TREB appears on the display The SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the tone control can be adjusted When adjusting BASS MID or TREB turn the SELECT knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To adjust all of the tone controls to the middle position press and hold TONE until FLAT appears on the display EQ Equalizer This feature allows you to choose preset bass mid and treble equalization settings designed for different program types Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting Each time you press EQ another setting will appear on the display You can preset up to six equalization settings by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to select the desired equalization 3 Press and hold EQ for two seconds SELECT EQ will appear on the display The EQ icon will flash 4 Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the desired EQ number Each time you press EQ or turn
334. tion You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What s the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution If you have traction control keep the system on It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road Even though your vehicle has a traction control system you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions See Traction Control System in the Index If you don t have the traction control system accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more 4 27 Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have the anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot th
335. tion programming display 2 103 3 Press the SELECT button to enter personalization programming mode 4 The first choice to be made will be DRIVER ID 1 or 2 Press the RESET button to toggle between your selections within a display and SELECT to choose the current selection and move on to the next personalization feature You are now in the selection mode and the DIC is ready to program your personal choices in memory Each feature that can be personalized will appear in the display Once you have made a selection for a feature the DIC will move on to the next personalization feature Scroll through the following messages and feature options AUTO DOOR LOCKS OFF ON UNLOCK OFF ON UNLOCK KEY OFF PARK DOOR TO UNLOCK DRIVER ALL WINDOW LOCKOUT R PASS REAR KEYLESS FEEDBACK OFF ON LIGHTS FEEDBACK OFF ON 2 104 HORN FEEDBACK OFF ON DELAYED LOCKING OFF ON PERIMETER LIGHTS OFF ON PERIMETER LIGHTS TIMEOUT 15 SEC SEAT RECALL OFF ON RECALL POSITION MEMORY EXIT TILT MIRROR OFF ON DRIVER ID OFF ON If you would like to exit the selection mode without moving through each of the personalization features simply press a different button on the DIC or turn off the ignition The personal choices you made will still be retained even without passing through each of the features In order for your personal choices to save you must press SELECT after making your selections If you h
336. to PARK P to hold your vehicle in position on a hill Parking Brake AAAA ir Your vehicle has a PUSH TO RELEASE parking brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on and four chimes will be heard If you start to drive with the parking brake set a chime will sound after the vehicle has traveled approximately 40 feet 12 m 2 33 To release the parking brake hold the regular brake Shifting Into PARK P pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left foot This will release the parking brake pedal When you lift your left foot the parking brake pedal will follow it to the release position If you try to drive with the parking brake on the brake light stays on and a chime sounds until you release the parking brake It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to ove
337. to a different vehicle it will not operate and LOCKED will be displayed With THEFTLOCK activated your radio will not operate if stolen 3 43 Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature you can control certain radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel PRESET Press this button to hear the radio stations that are set on your pushbuttons The radio will go to a preset station play for a few seconds then go to the next station Press this button again to stop scanning the preset stations When a cassette tape is playing press this button to change tape sides If a compact disc is playing in the CD changer press this button to select the next loaded disc 3 44 AM FM Press this button to select AM FM1 or FM2 The band you select will be displayed The frequency will also be displayed and if the station is in stereo the stereo indicator will also be displayed If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing it will stop and the radio will play A SEEK V Press the up or down arrow to go to the next or previous radio station and stay there If a cassette tape is playing press the up arrow to search for the next selection on the tape Press the down arrow to search for the previous selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for SEEK to work If a compact disc is playing press the up arrow to go to the start of the
338. to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put the shift lever in PARK P 3 Turn off the engine The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and To be even more certain the vehicle won t move change a tire you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end 5 21 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 4 Unscrew the wing nuts to remove the container that holds the wrench and jack 5 Remove the wheel wrench jack and the spare tire from the trunk The equipment you ll need is in the trunk 1 Pull the carpeting from the floor of the trunk 2 Remove the retainer then lift and remove the cover The tools you ll be using include the jack A and 3 Remove the compact spare tire See Compact Spare wheel wrench B Tire later in this section for more information about the compact spare tire 5 22 Removing Wheel Covers and Wheel Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Nut Caps Spare Tire If your vehicle has aluminum wheels and a center cover hides the wheel nuts remove the center cover by using the flat end of the wrench to pry it off Do not drop the cover or lay it face down as it could become scratched or damaged Do not use a hammer or mallet on this type of cover 1 Use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel nuts b
339. tom placing a disc on the tray label side up If you load a disc label side down the disc will not play and an error will occur Gently push the tray back into the magazine slot until it locks into place Repeat this procedure for loading up to 12 discs in the magazine 3 40 Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine slide open the door of the compact disc CD changer Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on top of the magazine Close the door by sliding it all the way to the right When the door is closed the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine This will continue for up to one and a half minutes depending on the number of discs loaded To eject the magazine from the player slide the CD changer door all the way open The magazine will automatically eject Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer and the door is closed the compact disc symbol will appear on the radio display If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs the compact disc symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play If CD changer mode is entered during initialization LOADING will appear on the display When a CD begins playing a disc and track number will be displayed The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine All of the CD functions a
340. ton press the SELECT button to record your choice KEYLESS FEEDBACK OFF ON LIGHTS FEEDBACK OFF ON HORN FEEDBACK OFF ON If you choose ON for KEYLESS FEEDBACK you will also need to choose LIGHTS and or HORN FEEDBACK You can select the following modes e If you choose OFF for KEYLESS FEEDBACK you will receive no security feedback when locking or unlocking your vehicle If you choose ON for KEYLESS FEEDBACK and ON for LIGHTS FEEDBACK the exterior lamps will flash twice when unlocking your vehicle and once when locking your vehicle If you choose ON for KEYLESS FEEDBACK and ON for HORN FEEDBACK your horn will chirp when locking and unlocking your vehicle If you choose ON for KEYLESS LIGHTS and HORN FEEDBACK your exterior lamps will flash twice at the first unlock button press your exterior lamps will flash twice and your horn will chirp once at the second unlock button press and the exterior lamps will flash once and the horn will chirp once when locking your vehicle For more information on this feature see Security Feedback in the Index Delayed Locking The delayed locking feature which delays the actual locking of the vehicle can be made active or inactive through the DIC When DELAYED LOCKING OFF ON appears on the display use the RESET button to toggle the arrow between OFF and ON When you have made your choice press the SELECT button to record your selection For more inf
341. ts in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts 1 2 Seats and Seat Controls 1 32 Rear Seat Passengers 1 8 Safety Belts They re for Everyone 1 35 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children 1 12 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About and Small Adults Safety Belts and the Answers 1 37 Children 1 14 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 41 Restraint Systems for Children 1 14 Driver Position 1 55 Older Children 1 20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 58 Safety Belt Extender 1 21 Right Front Passenger Position 1 58 Checking Your Restraint Systems 1 21 Air Bag Systems 1 58 Replacing Restraint System Parts 1 Center Front Passenger Position After a Crash Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the seats how to adjust them and also about reclining seatbacks and the head restraints Manual Front Seat You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you don t want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving Pull up on the control bar located under the front of the seat to unlock it Slide the seat to where you want it and then release the bar Try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place Manual Lumbar Support
342. ucing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth Cleaning of Fabric Carpet Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and carpet They will clean normal spots and stains very well You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set 6 58 Carefully scrape off any excess stain Use a clean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn e If aring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Using Cleaner on Fabric 1 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt 2 Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines 3 Follow the directions on the container label 4 Apply cleaner with a clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly 5 As soon as you ve cleaned the section use a sponge to remove any excess cleaner 6 Wipe cleaned area with a clean water dampened towel or cloth 7 Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup co
343. ue specification 12 Don t try to put the wheel cover on the compact Storing the Flat Tire and Tools spare tire It won t fit Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have replaced the compact spare tire with a regular tire Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the NOTICE passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place Wheel covers won t fit on your compact spare If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare you could damage the cover or the spare When you reinstall the full size wheel and tire you After you ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle install the wheel cover or nut caps at this point you ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk When reinstalling the nut caps on aluminum wheels Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible tighten the caps snug with the wheel wrench Then Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment in continue tightening one quarter turn for plastic caps the trunk For storage the jack must be raised until the or one eighth turn for steel caps Do not overtighten screw end is flush with the edge of the jack 5 29 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike
344. uestions Underinflated tires pose the same danger as about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see overloaded tires The resulting accident your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index CAUTION Continued 6 46 Inflation Tire Pressure The Tire Loading Information label which is on the rear edge of the driver s door shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km If you ll be driving at high speeds e g speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall or to 35 psi 244 kPa whichever is lower See the exa
345. ugh Deep Standing Water NOTICE If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly 4 20 Driving Through Flowing Water Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Don t ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires in the Index City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map a
346. ugh outside When you close the door with the ignition off the interior lamps will stay on for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned on Locking the doors with the power door lock switch or with the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped will override the delayed entry lighting and the lamps will turn off immediately 2 51 Theater Dimming This feature allows for a three to five second fade out of the courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off after you remove the key from the ignition Delayed Exit Lighting This feature will turn on the interior lamps for 25 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition while the doors are closed and it is night This will give you time to find the door handle or lock switches as you exit the vehicle This lighting will only be deactivated if the key is reinserted into the ignition switch or the power door locks are activated Parade Dimming To activate the instrument panel backlighting during the day turn the exterior lamp switch to the parking lamp or headlamp position Dimming of the instrument panel display is not possible during daylight hours The instrument panel display can only be adjusted when the parking lamps or headlamps are on and it is dark outside 2 52 Perimeter Lighting When the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter if equipped is pressed the DRL headlamps parking lamps and back up lamps
347. uld be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather 6 59 Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water 6 60 Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index NOTICE Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window an electric defogger element may be damaged Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and W
348. ur location Vehicle model year and color Mileage of vehicle Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle license plate number Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Pontiac s judgement the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service it is added security while traveling for you and your family Remember we re only a phone call away Pontiac Roadside Assistance 1 800 ROADSIDE or 1 800 762 3743 text telephone TTY users call 1 888 889 2438 Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book or call 1 800 268 6800 for emergency services Courtesy Transportation Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs
349. ur vehicle does have this feature there is a glow in the dark trunk release handle located in the trunk near the trunk latch This handle will glow following exposure to light Pull the release handle up to open the trunk from the inside Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it With the ignition off and the driver s door open you ll hear a tone reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your steering wheel will be locked and so will your ignition and transaxle And remember to lock the doors Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehicle Remember to keep your valuables out of sight Put them in a storage area or take them with you Parking Lots Even if you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle it s still best to lock it up and take your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key If possible park in a busy well lit area Put your valuables in a storage area like your trunk or glove box Be sure to close and lock the storage area Close all windows Lo
350. urer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for reservoir location 6 29 Adding Washer Fluid The washer fluid warning light will come on when the NOTICE ignition switch is on and the fluid container is less than one third full On vehicles with the optional Driver When using concentrated washer fluid Information Center DIC a WASHER FLUID LOW follow the manufacturer s instructions for message will be displayed and a chime will sound adding water letting you know to add windshield washer fluid to Don t mix water with ready to use washer your vehicle fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid tank is full Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it s very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint 6 30 Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver s side of the engine compartment It is filled with
351. urn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If your vehicle has traction control you should turn the system off See Traction Control System in the Index Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that doesn t get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index y Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care Service Fuel Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood 2 Engine Oil 7 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 9 Passenger Compartment Air Filter If Equipped Supercharger Oil Automatic Transaxle Fluid Engine Coolant Radiator Pressure Cap Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid Brakes I I I 1 I I I mR m OODNW N DADDADDDD DDADADDADD WN
352. ut don t remove them 2 The jack has a bolt at the end Attach the wheel wrench to the bolt to create a jack handle 5 23 3 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the jack lift head until it fits under the vehicle 5 24 Put the jack head into a notch in the frame which is located near each wheel well The front notch is 11 inches 28 cm back from the front wheel well The rear notch is 3 5 inches 9 cm forward from the rear wheel well Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the compact spare tire to fit under the wheel well Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire 5 25 7 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel
353. utton to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM and the track number will appear on the display 4 lt q Reverse Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release it to play the passage The display will show elapsed time EQ Equalizer Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a compact disc The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc See EQ listed previously for more information A SEEK V Press the down arrow while playing a CD to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played Press the up arrow to go to the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc A SCAN V Press and hold one of the SCAN arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep The disc will go to the next track play for a few seconds then go on to the next track Press this button again to stop scanning The sound will mute while scanning SCAN and the track number will appear on the display 3 27 RCL Recall Press this button to see how long the current track has been playing To change what is normally shown on the display track or elapsed time press the button until you see the display you want then hold the button until the display flashes
354. ve the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully If you try to drive off with the parking brake set a chime will also come on until you release the parking brake If the light stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem If you have the optional Driver Information Center DIC a PARK BRAKE SET message will be displayed while the parking brake is set Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light Canada ANTI LOCK United States With the anti lock brake system the light s will come on when your engine is started and may stay on for five seconds That s normal If the light stays on turn the ignition to OFF Or if the light comes on when you re driving stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the light still stays on or comes on again while you re driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light isn t
355. ver occurs first Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions will cause engine oil to break down slower When to Change Engine Oil Vehicles With the GM Oil Life System Option If so equipped your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary An ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will come on Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two times you stop for fuel It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this 6 16 time the system must be reset It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Oil Life System Option The GM Oil Life Sys
356. w signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts TM Ui LNX n Y ledi 4 18 Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can t try to slow down before you hit them Wet brakes can cause accidents They won t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning ed By Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Thro
357. warning lights This is the position for driving your vehicle START This position starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition switch will return to ON for normal driving Even if the engine is not running ACC and ON are positions that allow you to operate your electrical accessories Key Reminder Warning If you leave your key in OFF you will hear a warning tone when you open the driver s door Retained Accessory Power RAP After you turn the ignition off and remove the key you will still have power to such accessories as the radio sunroof option and power windows for up to 10 minutes Power is turned off if you open a door Always leave your key in OFF If you leave your key in any position other than OFF your battery will discharge prematurely 2 27 Starting Your Engine e NOTICE Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a P safety feature To restart when you re already moving Holding your key m START for longer than use NEUTRAL N only 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter moving If you do you could damage the transaxle Shift to PARK P only wh
358. warning sound have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes with or without the vehicle moving your brakes adjust for wear 6 33 Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your
359. ways have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill Drive in the highest gear possible Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action 4 25 Here are some tips for winter driving Have your vehicle in good shape for winter You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your trunk Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situa
360. will turn on if it is dark enough outside Personalization Programming This feature can be programmed in the on or off mode for each transmitter To turn the feature off do the following 1 Keep all doors closed the vehicle in PARK P and the ignition on throughout this procedure 2 Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock switch throughout this procedure All the doors will lock 3 Press the instant alarm on the transmitter Perimeter lighting remains on at this time and the horn will chirp twice 4 Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again Perimeter lighting is disabled and the horn will chirp once 5 Release the door lock switch The perimeter lighting feature is now off To turn the feature on do the following 1 Keep all doors closed the vehicle in PARK P and the ignition on throughout this procedure 2 Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock switch throughout this procedure All the doors will lock 3 Press the instant alarm on the transmitter Perimeter lighting remains off at this time and the horn will chirp once 4 Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again Perimeter lighting is now enabled and the horn will chirp twice 5 Release the door lock switch The perimeter lighting feature is now on This procedure only changes the mode for the transmitter used to change this setting The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter If your vehicle is equi
361. windshield outlets BI LEVEL This setting directs airflow through both the instrument panel outlets and the floor ducts This mode will deliver slightly warmer air through the floor ducts PANEL This setting directs airflow through the instrument panel outlets Whenever MODE is pressed the display will show the current system settings for five seconds before returning the display to the exterior temperature Kay FRONT Defrost This setting directs most of the airflow to the windshield with some airflow to the side window outlets and floor ducts To improve windshield clearing performance when you select FRONT defrost the air conditioning compressor will run automatically when outside temperatures are above approximately 40 F 4 C This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Even though the compressor may be running the A C light will not come on in FRONT defrost unless you select A C X gt OUTSIDE AIR Press this button to send outside air through the system lt amp RECIRC Recirculation Press this button to limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle This is helpful when you are trying to quickly cool the interior of the vehicle or limit odors entering the vehicle RECIRC may be selected in all manual airflow modes except FRONT defrost If you select RECIRC while in FRONT defrost the RECIRC light will flash to let you know that this is not allowed by the system This is to prevent fo
362. xtender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 31 Rear Seat Passengers It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Rear Seat Passenger Positions Lap Shoulder Belt All rear seating positions have lap shoulder belts Here s how to wear one properly 1 32 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 To make the l
363. y adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a day s work don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course yov ll find experienced and able service experts in Pontiac dealersh
364. yer Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use Your radio may display CLEAN PLAYER to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality clean the tape player The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer GM Part No 12344789 You may also choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended After you clean the player press and hold the eject button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYER indicator The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator was reset Casset
365. your vehicle to cool down Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best If you have the standard system for quick cool down on very hot days use the airflow from the instrument panel outlets press RECIRC and A C with the temperature knob in the blue area If this maximum A C setting is used for long periods of time the air in your vehicle may become too cold and dry For normal cooling on hot days use A C without recirculation with the temperature knob in the blue area If you have the electronic system in AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle Also while in AUTO mode the system will maximize its performance by using recirculation as necessary On cool but sunny days with the standard system or through manual operation of the electronic system use bi level to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets To warm or cool the air delivered turn the temperature knobs Heating If you have the standard system on cold days use the floor ducts with the temperature knob in the red area If you have the electronic system press AUTO and adjust the temperature by turning the temperature knob up or down You may also adjust the electronic system manually by pressing the MODE button and selecting FLOOR Again adjust the temperature by turning the temperature knobs With either system outside air will be heated and sent through the floor duct
366. ys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels If Equipped Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

6 - SEW Eurodrive  Design of Device to Stretch Tunable Stiffness Substrates for Cell  Untitled  OPERATORLS MANUAL  Anleitung  Ovation F-95WW User Manual Rev. 1  KF730 user manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file